Grade 6

6
Level
Author
Margot Kinberg, Ph.D.
Contributing Author Publishing Credits
Christine Dugan, M.A.Ed. Dona Herweck Rice, Editor-in-Chief; Robin Erickson, Production Director;
Lee Aucoin, Creative Director; Timothy J. Bradley, Illustration Manager;
Sara Johnson, M.S.Ed., Senior Editor; Aubrie Nielsen, M.S.Ed., Editor;
Leah Quillian, Assistant Editor; Grace Alba, Designer; David Saracino, Illustrator;
Howard McWilliam, Illustrator; Jennifer King-Harvey, Illustrator;
Stephanie Reid, Photo Editor; Corinne Burton, M.A.Ed., Publisher
Image Credits
Cover, Howard McWilliam; p. 54 [SF22640] Corbis; p. 138 [LC-USZ62-11564], p. 150 [LC-USZ62-105310] The Library of Congress; p. 174
Wikimedia; p. 186 [NARA mn57875] galleryget.com; p. 198 NASA; all other photos Shutterstock
Standards
© 2004 Mid-continent Research for Education and Learning (McREL)
© 2007 Teachers of English to Speakers of Other Languages, Inc. (TESOL)
© 2007 Board of Regents of the University of Wisconsin System. World-Class Instructional Design and Assessment
(WIDA). For more information on using the WIDA ELP Standards, please visit the WIDA website at www.wida.us.
© 2010 National Governors Association Center for Best Practices and Council of Chief State School Officers (CCSS)
Shell Education
5482 Argosy Avenue
Huntington Beach, CA 92649-1030
www.tcmpub.com/shell-education
ISBN 978-1-4258-0927-0
©2020 Shell Education Publishing, Inc.
The classroom teacher may reproduce copies of materials in this book for classroom use only. The reproduction of any part
for an entire school or school system is strictly prohibited. No part of this publication may be transmitted, stored, or recorded
in any form without written permission from the publisher.
2 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Table of Contents
Introduction and Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Standards Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Daily Practice Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
References Cited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Digital Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Introduction and Research

The Need for Practice
In order to be successful in today’s reading classroom, students must deeply understand both
concepts and procedures so that they can discuss and demonstrate their understanding.
Demonstrating understanding is a process that must be continually practiced in order for
students to be successful. According to Marzano, “practice has always been, and always
will be, a necessary ingredient to learning procedural knowledge at a level at which students
execute it independently” (2010, 83). Practice is especially important to help students apply
reading comprehension strategies and word-study skills.
Understanding Assessment
In addition to providing opportunities for frequent practice, teachers must be able to
assess students’ comprehension and word-study skills. This is important so that teachers
can adequately address students’ misconceptions, build on their current understanding,
and challenge them appropriately. Assessment is a long-term process that often involves
careful analysis of student responses from a lesson discussion, a project, a practice sheet,
or a test. When analyzing the data, it is important for teachers to reflect on how their
teaching practices may have influenced students’ responses and to identify those areas where
additional instruction may be required. In short, the data gathered from assessments should
be used to inform instruction: slow down, speed up, or reteach. This type of assessment is
called formative assessment.
© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 3

How to Use This Book
180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade offers teachers and parents a full page of daily reading
comprehension and word-study practice activities for each day of the school year.
Easy to Use and Standards Based

These activities reinforce grade-level skills across a variety of reading concepts. The
questions are provided as a full practice page, making them easy to prepare and implement
as part of a classroom morning routine, at the beginning of each reading lesson, or as
homework.
Every sixth-grade practice page provides questions that are tied to a reading or writing
standard. Students are given the opportunity for regular practice in reading comprehension
and word study, allowing them to build confidence through these quick standards-based
activities.
Question College and Career Readiness Standards

Days 1–3
Reading Anchor Standard 1: Read closely to determine what the text says explicitly and to make
1–2 logical inferences from it.
Reading Anchor Standard 4: Interpret words and phrases as they are used in a text, including
3–5 determining technical, connotative, and figurative meanings, and analyze how specific word choices
shape meaning or tone.
Day 4
Reading Anchor Standard 10: Read and comprehend complex literary and informational texts
1–2
independently and proficiently.
Reading Anchor Standard 1: Read closely to determine what the text says explicitly and to make
logical inferences from it or
3–6
Reading Anchor Standard 6: Assess how point of view or purpose shapes the content and style of
a text.
Reading Anchor Standard 2: Determine central ideas or themes of a text and analyze their
7–8
development; summarize the key supporting details and ideas.
Day 5
Writing Anchor Standard 4: Produce clear and coherent writing in which the development,
organization, and style are appropriate to task, purpose, and audience.

How to Use This Book (cont.)
Using the Practice Pages

Practice pages provide instruction and assessment opportunities for each day of the
school year. The activities are organized into weekly themes, and teachers may wish
to prepare packets of each week’s practice pages for students. Days 1, 2, and 3 follow a
consistent format, with a short piece of text and five corresponding items. As outlined on
page 4, every item is aligned to a reading standard.
WEEK 1
DAY
2 Name: ____________________________
___ Date:__________________
.
the text and then answer the questions
Directions Read
SCORE body uses that energy

calories you eat and drink? Your
What does your body do with the grow. If you do not get
body also uses calories to help you
to help you move and think. Your well. You do not grow
much energy. You cannot think as
1. Y N enough calories, you do not have Your hair, skin, and nails are not at their
to heal properly.
properly and it is hard for your body for healing, and for energy. So it is very
for growing,
healthiest. Your body needs calories than you need?
What happens if you get more calories
important to get enough calories. you are active. If you do not use
2. Y N WEE K 1 that energy. You use that energy when
stores be
Your body
Y can gain weight. Being overweight
is not healthy. So it is important to
DAyou
that energy,
get more calories than you need.
active. It is also important not to
3. Y N
1 Name: _________
WEEK 1
DAY
_________ ____________
Date:_________
Name : _______________
______ __________ 1. Which is not a way that your body
uses calories?
4. Which of these words is an adverb?
Directions
__________
Date:_________
_________ 3
er the question
s. 4. Y N A properly Read the text
and then answer the
and then answ
Directions
Read the text A thinking SCORE B grow
questions.
Be growing C heal Some foods are

mov
y also nee5.ds energy to have more calo higher in calo
ries than are
and hea l itself. Your bod es from
Y N t you drink.
wha C healing 1. Y N D you fries has 14.5
ries than food
s that are low
other foods. Foo
ds that are high SCORE
grow com
ds energy to you eat. It also look at the gram
grams of fat and s of fat and has 271 calo
in fat. For exam in fat often
Your body nee es from the food drink? You can t ple,
ries, but two oun a small serving of french
and think . Tha t energy com
ene rgy you get whe n you eat and
man y calo ries they haveD . Thagetting rid of energy
and vegetable
has only 85 calo
ries. Healthy ces of turkey
tell how much that tell you how something. You t 5. Which word is a synonym for gain?
s are usually foods such as has just over
How can you ks have labels g or drinking you can neve low in fat. The
y are also very lean meat, whole grain 1.5 1. Y N
t foods and drin rgy you could get from eatin healthy. But wha 2. Y N r have french
fries or potato good for you. s, fruit
calories. Mos body can stay hich sentence reflects a fact from
of the calories That doesn’t mea s,
how much ene
number tells you ber of calories every day.
That way, your
d between 2.
/ 5 0 and 2,500 Which
___ 1,60 A lose and get most
you eat are hea chips, but it is
lthy calories. a good idea to
make sure that n
t num most kids nee ld get. this text? of your calories Eat
from these food plenty of fruits and vegetable
d the righ e is diffe rent . But calo Total shou
ries you chips, and fried most
nee
righ t num ber? Everyon you deci de how many B increase food, for treats. s. Save high-fat
foods, such as
s and protein, 2.
is the or can help Y N
day. Your doct A 3. YnotN important.
Calories are candy, potato
calories every C notice
B is a good idea to eat as much as
ofItthe D
matical feature youtocan. calculate 1.
4. What is a gram y nee ds energy
Whi
hich
ch of these is
not a 3.
bod Y N
marizes this text? sentence: Your 4. Y N high-calo
calorie food?
4.
Which title sum l itself.C It is important to get the right number If the author reco
1. grow and hea
of calories. A lean meat readers eat plen
mmends that
ty
A All About Calo
ries noun. vegetables, and of fruits,
t Dinn er!
A It has only one D .
You should not get any calories. B cookies the word plen
protein, what
does 4. Y N
B Cooking a Grea nd predicate 5. Y N ty tell you?
B It has a compou C french fries
C The Earth’s Ene
rgy icates.
A Eat no vegetable
C It has five pred 3. hich prefix could be added to D fried chicken
D New Food For
You to Try
s.
Which
properly to make its antonym?
B Eat a few piec s. 5.
D It has four verb Y N
C Eat no fruits, es of fruit.
body get ene
rgy? A pre– ___ / 5 2. Howw would a read D Eat lots of fruitvegetables, or protein.
Where does your is most closely er use a title
2. 5. Which image
this text? B im– Total as “Choosing
Hea
understand mor lthy Foods” to
such
and protein.
s, vegetables,
associated with
A from growing C ab–on
fit pers A
e about this text?
___ / 5
a healthy and
B from healing itself A the image of
food
D
mea l pro–
It would hint at
the text.
the main idea
of 5. What does the
phrase most Total
a fast-
C from food and drink B the image of B It would be a
mean? of
a doctor joke from the
D from labels C the image of Education
© Shell the reader. author to A none of
l
a clothing labe
#50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth
Grade
C
D the image of16 It would reveal B a few of
people the words that
or claims that most common are C the majority of
3. When the auth ries, in the text.
t number of calo D
need the righ It would desc
infer about the ribe a picture. D some of
what can you se?
that phra
meaning of
everyone shou
ld eat 3. What is the definition
A It means that ries. of usually?
e number of calo A never
the exact sam
amount
ng the healthy B most of the time
B It means findi
idual’s body.
for each indiv C once in a whil
exceeding
C It means not
2,500 calories.
D every week e
ain
only consuming cert
D It mea ns
types of calories. 15 © Shell Education
for Sixth Grade
Days of Reading
#50927—180
#50927—180
Days of Reading
for Sixth Grade
© Shell Education 17
Using the Scoring Guide

Use the scoring guide along the side of each practice page to check answers and see at a
glance which skills may need more reinforcement.
Fill in the appropriate circle for each problem to indicate correct (Y) or incorrect (N)
responses. You might wish to indicate only incorrect responses to focus on those skills.
(For example, if students consistently miss items 2 and 4, they may need additional help
with those concepts as outlined in the table on page 4.) Use the answer key at the back of
the book to score the problems, or you may call out answers to have students self-score or
peer-score their work.
WEEK 2 WEEK 2
DAY DAY
WEEK 2
DAYS Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
4 5
Date:______________
____ Name: ______________
4–5 Name: _______ ______________
_______ ___
Directions Read “The Blowout Block Party” and then answer the questions.
______________
___ Date:______________
____
Directions Reread “The Blowout
Block Party.” Then,
respond on the lines read the prompt
ck Party
SCORE SCORE below. and
The Blowout Blo

1. Which is a good word to 5. How does Brooke likely feel given
___ / 4
describe Brooke? that her idea worked so well?
books and other 1. Y N What kind of fund-rais
more er would you plan
at her school needed enough funding for new A A do for your fund-rais for your school?
d because the library there wasn’t fearful proud er, and where the Write about what
Brooke was concerne told Brooke that for the library. She money would go. you would
Jordan, the librarian, school could have a fund-raiser B B
materials. But Mrs. the on a block party
potluck. organized jealous
decided to ask if club, and they settled as the price of admission. ______________
materials. So Brooke C C 2.
the head of the booster selfish fearful Y N ______________
dish to share
talked to Mrs. Archer, asked to buy a ticket and bring a new materials.
______________
______________
Each person would
be
sales would be given to
the library to buy D athletic D curious ______________
______________
_____________
the ticket
The money from flyers and got ______________
together they created got permission to ______________
friends and Mrs. Archer, and the school and 3. Y N ______________
______________
_____________
Brooke worked with
her
Archer arranged
for the party to be
held at
was even going to
show movies. There would also be long
be 2. Which word in this text would help 6. What do you think Mrs. Jordan’s ______________
______________
tickets printed. Mrs. would be used to There a reader understand the relevant opinion is about the fund-raiser? ______________ _____________
rooms. One room for the winners. ______________
use some of the outside, with prizes played in a local definition of band? ______________
would be games knew someone who A ______________
popcorn. There drinks. Mrs. Archer She probably thinks the fund-raiser is 4. Y N ______________ _____________
for the food and A ______________
tables set up outside too. programs not a good idea. ______________
be music at the party, know ______________
band, so there would and let everyone B B ______________ _____________
to publicize the party the music She is probably happy that money ______________
g was planned, the next step was
posted a notice about the party on was raised for the library.
______________
______________
Once everythin out the flyers, er, C 5. Y N
the local newspap tables ______________ _____________
and her friends passed posted notices in C ______________
about it. Brooke they knew. They spread the word. She is probably angry about ______________
school’s website,
and called everyone to ask them to help
D books
the fund-raiser. ______________
______________
_____________
of the radio stations ______________
too, and called some hoping that the ______________
Brooke was really D She is probably afraid to get new 6. ______________
success. It certainly Y N
______________ _____________
party would be a 3. What do you think might happen if it ______________
be. It was a materials for the library.
______________
seemed that it would rained during the party? ______________
party was to begin ______________ _____________
beautiful day. The to ______________
when Brooke got ______________
at one o’clock, but irty, there were A Brooke would not play in the band. 7. What indicates that the party will be 7. Y N ______________
the school at twelve-th She knew then a success?
______________ _____________
______________
already people waiting! B The money would not be given to ______________
______________
idea had worked. the library. ______________ _____________
that her A It rains on the day of the party. ______________
______________
raised C The party would be held outside. 8. Y N ______________
The fund-rais ing party
for the library.
B People stay up all night the night ______________
______________
_____________
hundreds of dollars
school was able
to D People would go inside and have the before the party. ______________
______________
Before long, the party there. C ______________ _____________
and computer A few students go to the party. ______________
buy many new books ______________
Brooke and the other D ______________
programs. Now, When Brooke gets to the school, ______________ _____________
more resources, ___ / 8 ______________
students would have of a party! 4. Which statement reflects a purpose there are already people there. ______________
______________
and it was all because for reading this text? Total ______________
______________
_____________
______________
______________
A I want to learn how to cook for 8. Which is a theme in this text? ______________
______________
_____________
my friends. ______________
______________
B I want to find out why someone would
A determination ______________
______________
_____________
______________
throw a blowout block party. B dishonesty ______________
______________
_____________
______________
C I want to see a map of a block party. C discrimination ______________
______________
______________ _____________
D I want to know where my own block D conceitedness ______________
______________
party is in my neighborhood. ______________
_____________
© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading ffor Sixth Grade 25 26 #50927—180 Days
© Shell Education of Reading for Sixth
Grade
Grade
of Reading for Sixth
24 #50927—180 Days © Shell Education
A longer text is used for Days 4 and 5. Students answer more in-depth comprehension
questions on Day 4 and complete a written response to the text on Day 5. This longer text
can also be used for fluency practice (see page 7).
Writing Rubric
Score students’ written response using the rubric below. Display the rubric for students to
reference as they write (G6_writing_rubric.pdf ).
Points Criteria
• Uses an appropriate organizational sequence to produce very clear and
coherent writing
4 • Uses descriptive language that develops or clarifies ideas
• Engages the reader
• Uses a style very appropriate to task, purpose, and audience
• Uses an organizational sequence to produce clear and coherent writing
• Uses descriptive language that develops or clarifies ideas
3
• Engages the reader
• Uses a style appropriate to task, purpose, and audience
• Uses an organizational sequence to produce somewhat clear and
coherent writing
2 • Uses some descriptive language that develops or clarifies ideas
• Engages the reader in some way
• Uses a style somewhat appropriate to task, purpose, and audience
• Does not use an organized sequence; the writing is not clear or coherent
• Uses little descriptive language to develop or clarify ideas
1
• Does not engage the reader
• Does not use a style appropriate to task, purpose, or audience
0 Offers no writing or does not respond to the assignment presented

Developing Students’ Fluency Skills

What Is Fluency?
According to the National Reading Panel Report, there are five critical factors that are vital
to effective reading instruction: phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, vocabulary, and
comprehension (2000). Rasinski (2006) defines fluency as “the ability to accurately and
effortlessly decode the written words and then to give meaning to those words through
appropriate phrasing and oral expression of the words.” Wolf (2005) notes that the goal of
developing fluency is comprehension rather than the ability to read rapidly. Becoming a
fluent reader is a skill that develops gradually and requires practice. Reading text repeatedly
with a different purpose each time supports the development of fluency in young children
(Rasinski 2003).
Assessing Fluency
Fluent readers read accurately, with expression, and at a good pace. A Fluency Rubric along
with detailed instructions for scoring and keeping oral reading records is included in the
digital resources (G6_fluency.pdf ).
The table below lists fluency norms by grade level (Rasinski 2003):
Student Fluency Norms Based On Words Correct Per Minute (WCPM)

Grade Fall Winter Spring
1 — — 60 wcpm
2 53 78 94
3 79 93 114
4 99 112 118
5 105 118 128
6 115 132 145

Diagnostic Assessment
Teachers can use the practice pages as diagnostic assessments. The data analysis tools
included with the book enable teachers or parents to quickly score students’ work and
monitor their progress. Teachers and parents can see at a glance which reading concepts or
skills students may need to target in order to develop proficiency.
After students complete a practice page, grade each page using the answer key
(pages 231–237). Then, complete the Practice Page Item Analysis for the appropriate
day (pages 10–11) for the whole class, or the Student Item Analysis (pages 12–13) for
individual students. These charts are also provided in the digital resources (filenames:
G6_practicepage_analysis.pdf, G6_student_analysis.pdf ). Teachers can input data into the
electronic files directly on the computer, or they can print the pages and analyze students’
work using paper and pencil.
To complete the Practice Page Item Analyses:

• Write or type students’ names in the far-left column. Depending on the number of
students, more than one copy of the form may be needed, or you may need to add rows.
• The item numbers are included across the top of the charts. Each item correlates with
the matching question number from the practice page.
• For each student, record an X in the column if the student has the item incorrect. If the
item is correct, leave the item blank.
• Count the Xs in each row and column and fill in the correct boxes.
To complete the Student Item Analyses:

• Write or type the student’s name on the top row. This form tracks the ongoing progress
of each student, so one copy per student is necessary.
• The item numbers are included across the top of the chart. Each item correlates with
the matching question number from the practice page.
• For each day, record an X in the column if the student has the item incorrect. If the item
is correct, leave the item blank.
• Count the Xs in each row and column and fill in the correct boxes.

Using the Results to Differentiate Instruction

Once results are gathered and analyzed, teachers can use the results to inform the way
they differentiate instruction. The data can help determine which concepts are the most
difficult for students and which need additional instructional support and continued
practice. Depending on how often the practice pages are scored, results can be considered for
instructional support on a daily or weekly basis.
Whole-Class Support
The results of the diagnostic analysis may show that the entire class is struggling with a
particular concept or group of concepts. If these concepts have been taught in the past,
this indicates that further instruction or reteaching is necessary. If these concepts have not
been taught in the past, this data is a great preassessment and demonstrates that students do
not have a working knowledge of the concepts. Thus, careful planning for the length of the
unit(s) or lesson(s) must be considered, and extra frontloading may be required.
Small-Group or Individual Support

The results of the diagnostic analysis may show that an individual or small group of students
is struggling with a particular concept or group of concepts. If these concepts have been
taught in the past, this indicates that further instruction or reteaching is necessary. Consider
pulling aside these students while others are working independently to instruct further on
the concept(s). Teachers can also use the results to help identify individuals or groups of
proficient students who are ready for enrichment or above-grade-level instruction. These
students may benefit from independent learning contracts or more challenging activities.
Students may also benefit from extra practice using games or computer-based resources.
Digital Resources
Reference page 239 for information about accessing the digital resources and an overview of
the contents.

10
Directions: Record an X in cells to indicate where students have missed questions. Add up the totals. You can view the
following: (1) which items were missed per student; (2) the total correct score for each student; and (3) the total number of
students who missed each item.
Week: _____ Day: _____ Item # 1 2 3 4 5 # correct

Student Name
Sample Student x x 3/5
#50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade

# of students missing
each question
Practice Page Item Analysis Days 1–3
© Shell Education
Directions: Record an X in cells to indicate where students have missed questions. Add up the totals. You can view the
following: (1) which items were missed per student; (2) the total correct score for each student; and (3) the total number of
students who missed each item.
© Shell Education
Week: _____ Day: _____ Item # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # correct Written Response
Student Name
Sample Student x x x 5/8 3
# of students missing
each question 8
Written Response
#50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade

Average:
Practice Page Item Analysis Days 4–5
11
Student Item Analysis Days 1–3
Directions: Record an X in cells to indicate where the student has missed questions. Add
up the totals. You can view the following: (1) which items the student missed; (2) the total
correct score per day; and (3) the total number of times each item was missed.
Student Name: Sample Student

Item 1 2 3 4 5 # correct
Week Day
1 1 X X 3/5
Total

Student Item Analysis Days 4–5
Directions: Record an X in cells to indicate where the student has missed questions. Add
up the totals. You can view the following: (1) which items the student missed; (2) the total
correct score per day; and (3) the total number of times each item was missed.
Student Name: Sample Student

Day 4 Day 5
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # correct Written Response
Week
1 X X X 5/8 3
Total
Written Response
Average:

Standards Correlations
Shell Education is committed to producing educational materials that are research and
standards based. In this effort, we have correlated all of our products to the academic
standards of all 50 United States, the District of Columbia, the Department of Defense
Dependent Schools, and all Canadian provinces.
How To Find Standards Correlations

To print a customized correlation report of this product for your state, visit our website
at www.tcmpub.com/shell-education and follow the on-screen directions. If you
require assistance in printing correlation reports, please contact Customer Service at
1-877-777-3450.
Purpose and Intent of Standards

Legislation mandates that all states adopt academic standards that identify the skills
students will learn in kindergarten through grade twelve. Many states also have standards
for Pre-K. This same legislation sets requirements to ensure the standards are detailed and
comprehensive.
Standards are designed to focus instruction and guide adoption of curricula. Standards
are statements that describe the criteria necessary for students to meet specific academic
goals. They define the knowledge, skills, and content students should acquire at each level.
Standards are also used to develop standardized tests to evaluate students’ academic progress.
Teachers are required to demonstrate how their lessons meet state standards. State standards
are used in the development of all of our products, so educators can be assured they meet the
academic requirements of each state.
College and Career Readiness

The activities in this book are aligned to the college and career readiness (CCR) standards.
The chart on page 4 lists each standard that is addressed in this product.
TESOL and WIDA Standards

The activities in this book promote English language development for English language
learners.

WEEK 1
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
Directions Read the text and then answer the questions.
SCORE
Your body needs energy to grow and heal itself. Your body also needs energy to move
and think. That energy comes from the food you eat. It also comes from what you drink.
How can you tell how much energy you get when you eat and drink? You can look at the 1. Y N
calories. Most foods and drinks have labels that tell you how many calories they have. That
number tells you how much energy you could get from eating or drinking something. You
need the right number of calories every day. That way, your body can stay healthy. But
what is the right number? Everyone is different. Most kids need between 1,600 and 2,500 2. Y N
calories every day. Your doctor can help you decide how many calories you should get.
3. Y N
1. Which title summarizes this text? 4. What is a grammatical feature of this

sentence: Your body needs energy to
A All About Calories grow and heal itself. 4. Y N
B Cooking a Great Dinner! A It has only one noun.
C The Earth’s Energy B It has a compound predicate.
D New Food For You to Try 5. Y N
C It has five predicates.
D It has four verbs.
2. Where does your body get energy?
A from growing 5. Which is the tone of this text? ___ / 5

B from healing itself A informative Total
C from food and drinks B humorous
D from labels C fearful
D sorrowful
3. When the author claims that people
need the right number of calories,
what can you infer about the
meaning of that phrase?
A It means that everyone should eat

the exact same number of calories.
B It means finding the healthy amount
for each individual’s body.
C It means not exceeding
2,500 calories.
D It means only consuming certain
types of calories.

WEEK 1
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
What does your body do with the calories you eat and drink? Your body uses that energy
to help you move and think. Your body also uses calories to help you grow. If you do not get
1. Y N enough calories, you do not have much energy. You cannot think as well. You do not grow
properly and it is hard for your body to heal properly. Your hair, skin, and nails are not at their
healthiest. Your body needs calories for growing, for healing, and for energy. So it is very
important to get enough calories. What happens if you get more calories than you need?
2. Y N
Your body stores that energy. You use that energy when you are active. If you do not use
that energy, you can gain weight. Being overweight is not healthy. So it is important to be
active. It is also important not to get more calories than you need.
3. Y N
1. Which is not a way that your body 4. Which of these words is an adverb?
uses calories?
4. Y N
A properly
A thinking B grow
B growing C heal
5. Y N
C healing D you
D getting rid of energy
5. Which word is a synonym for gain?

___ / 5 2. Which sentence reflects a fact from
Total
this text? A lose
A Calories are not important.

B increase
B It is a good idea to eat as much as

C notice
you can. D calculate
C It is important to get the right number
of calories.
D You should not get any calories.
3. Which prefix could be added to

properly to make its antonym?
A pre–
B im–
C ab–
D pro–

WEEK 1
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Some foods are higher in calories than other foods. Foods that are high in fat often have
more calories than foods that are low in fat. For example, a small serving of french fries has
14.5 grams of fat and 271 calories, but two ounces of turkey has just over 1.5 grams of fat 1. Y N
and only 85 calories. Healthy foods such as lean meat, whole grains, fruits, and vegetables
are usually low in fat. They are also very good for you. That doesn’t mean you can never
have french fries or potato chips, but it is a good idea to make sure that most of the calories
you eat are healthy calories. Eat plenty of fruits and vegetables and protein, and get most of 2. Y N
your calories from these foods. Save high-fat foods, such as candy, potato chips, and fried
food, for treats.
3. Y N
1. Which of these is not a 4. If the author recommends that

high-calorie food? readers eat plenty of fruits,
4. Y N
vegetables, and protein, what does
A lean meat the word plenty tell you?
B cookies A Eat no vegetables.
C 5. Y N
french fries B Eat a few pieces of fruit.
D fried chicken C Eat no fruits, vegetables, or protein.
D Eat lots of fruits, vegetables,
2. How would a reader use a title such and protein. ___ / 5
as “Choosing Healthy Foods” to
understand more about this text? Total
A 5. What does the phrase most of

The title would hint at the main idea mean?
of the text.
B The title would be a joke from the
A none of
author to the reader. B a few of
C The title would reveal the words that C the majority of
are most common in the text. D some of
D The title would describe a picture.
3. What is the definition of usually?
A never
B most of the time
C once in a while
D every week

WEEK 1
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Supersized
Have you eaten at a fast-food restaurant lately? Many restaurants serve much bigger portions
of food than they used to serve. A portion is the amount of food that you get when you order.
For example, in the 1950s, a portion of french fries was about 2.4 ounces. Today’s portion can
be as high as 7 ounces or more. In the 1950s, a regular soda was 8 ounces. Today, that size
soda is more likely to be 24 ounces.
Why does it matter if portion sizes are bigger now? Isn’t that a good thing for customers? Not
if you want to eat a healthy diet. Bigger portions have more food in them, and the more food you
eat, the more calories your body gets. If you eat a lot of fast food, you are probably getting many
more calories than you need, and those
calories may not be healthy calories. Here
is just one example: A meal with a large
burger, fries, and a soda at one major
fast-food restaurant has 1,200 calories.
That is one-half to three-quarters of the
number of calories most kids should eat
in one day. That meal has a lot of fat
and salt without a lot of the vitamins and
minerals that your body needs. So, that
meal gives you a lot of calories but not
much nutrition.
You can enjoy fast food sometimes

without overeating. Most restaurant
menus tell you the number of calories in
each item. Look for a food choice with a
lower number of calories. Chances are
you will find something you like. When
you do order fried foods or other high-fat
foods, order a small portion. You will still
enjoy the taste! Don’t eat too quickly—it
takes your brain up to twenty minutes
to realize that your stomach is full. So
eat your food more slowly to give your
brain time to catch up. Then, you will feel
satisfied with less food. And remember
that fast food is best if you have it as a
treat once in a while—not every day.

WEEK 1
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Supersized” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which fact is true about restaurants 5. Since it takes the brain up to twenty
in the 1950s? minutes to know the stomach is full,
which conclusion makes sense? 1. Y N
A They served bigger portions.
B They did not serve soda.
A Meals should not be longer than
twenty minutes.
C They did not serve french fries. B Meals should take only
2. Y N
D They served smaller portions. twenty minutes.

C Eating slowly prevents you from
getting too full. 3. Y N
2. Which is a likely purpose for reading
this text? D Brains work slowly.
A I want to know how to supersize my 4. Y N
own meals at home. 6. Which is likely the author’s opinion?
B I want to understand why restaurants
A
are getting bigger. A healthy diet is important.
B 5. Y N
C I want to read about the history of Fast food is very good for you.
farms that grow our food. C A healthy diet doesn’t matter.
D I want to learn about healthy D Kids should eat more fast food. 6. Y N
portion sizes.
7. It takes Celia thirty minutes to

3. What is the author hoping readers eat lunch, but it takes Lisa fifteen 7. Y N
will do? minutes. What can you infer?
A eat a lot of fast food A Celia will not feel satisfied.
B eat fast food wisely B Lisa and Celia are not friends.
8. Y N
C never eat fast food again C Celia will feel satisfied with less food
D eat as quickly as you can than Lisa will.
D Lisa will be very hungry.
___ / 8
4. Why are bigger portions a problem?
Total
A They have too many calories. 8. Which conclusion about people in
the 1950s is the most realistic?
B They are too expensive.
C They do not taste good.
A They ate more fast food than we do.
D They do not fit on plates.

B They ate less fast food than we do.
C They ate the same amount of fast
food as we do.
D They ate no fast food at all.
WEEK 1
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Supersized.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
Directions lines below.
SCORE
___ / 4
How can you make smart food choices at your favorite fast-food restaurant? Write
about what you could do to make smart food choices.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 2
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Brooke had been in her school’s library for half an hour, looking unsuccessfully for some
information for a project. She was nearly ready to give up in frustration when she spotted
the school’s librarian. “Mrs. Jordan,” Brooke pleaded, “can I please have some help finding 1. Y N
some things?”
“I’ll certainly do my best, Brooke. What is it that you need?” Mrs. Jordan asked.
2. Y N
“I need good resources for my project on ancient Assyria, but there’s not much here.”
“I’m sorry you’re not finding what you need,” Mrs. Jordan said with some embarrassment.
“I wish we had more material on ancient Assyria, but we just don’t have the funding we need 3. Y N
for all the books we would like to have.”
Mrs. Jordan helped Brooke as best she could, but Brooke couldn’t help thinking the school
ought to hold a fund-raiser for more library materials. 4. Y N
1. What is Brooke’s problem? 4. What does the prefix un– in the word 5. Y N
unsuccessfully tell the reader about
A Mrs. Jordan is angry with her. Brooke’s search?
B She does not like being in the library.
A She finds everything she needs.
C She can’t find the material she needs.
B ___ / 5
She is successful.
D She has lost a library book.
C Total
She is not successful.
D She is afraid to ask for help.
2. How does the text explain why the
library does not have the material
it needs?
5. Which word is used to describe
A what a group holds in order to
The material is hard to find.
raise money?
B There is not enough funding.
C Mrs. Jordan does not like
A fund-raiser
the material. B library
D The library is too small. C material
D project
3. Which two words are synonyms?
A resources and project

B material and ancient
C project and library
D funding and money
WEEK 2
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Brooke was working on a project about ancient Assyria. She had looked in her school’s
library for material, but there wasn’t very much. So she had to go to the public library.
1. Y N
Brooke got what she needed at the public library, but she kept thinking that the school’s
library should have more resources. Mrs. Jordan, the librarian, told Brooke that the library
didn’t have the funding it needed. That was why there wasn’t enough material. So Brooke
2. Y N decided to ask if there could be a fund-raiser to get more library books and materials. She
talked to Mrs. Archer, who was head of the school’s booster club. Mrs. Archer thought a
library fund-raiser was a terrific idea. She and Brooke talked about what to do for a
fund-raiser and finally they hit on the perfect idea—a block party where everyone would
3. Y N bring food and a small donation.
4. Y N 1. Who is Mrs. Jordan? 4. What is an example of a

proper noun?
A Brooke’s teacher
B A Assyria
5. Y N the librarian
C the head of the booster club
B Mrs. Jordan
D none of the above

C Brooke
D all of the above
___ / 5
2. How do Brooke and Mrs. Archer
Total plan to solve the library’s 5. Which word is an antonym of public?
funding problem?
A library
A a block party fund-raiser B large
B a bigger library C private
C a trip to the public library D terrific
D a new booster club
3. Which word is a synonym

for donation?
A discussion
B library
C party
D contribution

WEEK 2
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Don’t Miss the Fabulous Blowout Block Party Potluck! 1. Y N
Do you enjoy eating delicious homemade food? Do you like to play games, watch
movies, and spend time with your friends? Then, you want to be there for the amazing
Blowout Block Party Potluck! The Block Party Potluck will be held at Mason Street 2. Y N
School on Saturday, September 17, from 1:00 p.m. until 5:00 p.m. Bring a potluck dish
to share, and sample some of the finest cooking in town! There will be music, movies,
games, and prizes, too! Don’t miss out on this spectacular event!
3. Y N
Get your tickets now: Adult tickets are $5.00, and student tickets are $4.00.
All proceeds from ticket sales will benefit the Mason Street School library, so get ready
to have a great time and help the library, too!
4. Y N
5.
1. Which information is not provided in 4. What does the adjective delicious tell Y N
this flyer? you about the food?
A the date of the block party A It is hard to find.

B the time and place of the block party B It is expensive. ___ / 5
C the price of the tickets C It tastes very good. Total
D titles of the movies that will be shown D It is easy to make.
2. Why is a flyer helpful for a reader? 5. Which word is not a

compound word?
A It is small.
B It is colorful.
A blowout
C It includes the most important facts.

B potluck
D It only includes pictures.

C homemade
D spectacular

for sample?
A taste
B cook
C attend
D ticket
WEEK 2
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
The Blowout Block Party

Brooke was concerned because the library at her school needed more books and other
materials. But Mrs. Jordan, the librarian, told Brooke that there wasn’t enough funding for new
materials. So Brooke decided to ask if the school could have a fund-raiser for the library. She
talked to Mrs. Archer, the head of the booster club, and they settled on a block party potluck.
Each person would be asked to buy a ticket and bring a dish to share as the price of admission.
The money from the ticket sales would be given to the library to buy new materials.
Brooke worked with her friends and Mrs. Archer, and together they created flyers and got
tickets printed. Mrs. Archer arranged for the party to be held at the school and got permission to
use some of the rooms. One room would be used to show movies. There was even going to be
popcorn. There would be games outside, with prizes for the winners. There would also be long
tables set up outside for the food and drinks. Mrs. Archer knew someone who played in a local
band, so there would be music at the party, too.
Once everything was planned, the next step was to publicize the party and let everyone know
about it. Brooke and her friends passed out the flyers, posted a notice about the party on the
school’s website, and called everyone they knew. They posted notices in the local newspaper,
too, and called some of the radio stations to ask them to help spread the word.
Brooke was really hoping that the

party would be a success. It certainly
seemed that it would be. It was a
beautiful day. The party was to begin
at one o’clock, but when Brooke got to
the school at twelve-thirty, there were
already people waiting! She knew then
that her idea had worked.
The fund-raising party raised

hundreds of dollars for the library.
Before long, the school was able to
buy many new books and computer
programs. Now, Brooke and the other
students would have more resources,
and it was all because of a party!

WEEK 2
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “The Blowout Block Party” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which is a good word to 5. How does Brooke likely feel, given
describe Brooke? that her idea worked so well?
1. Y N
A fearful A proud
B organized B jealous
C selfish C fearful 2. Y N
D athletic D curious
3. Y N
2. Which word in this text would help 6. What do you think Mrs. Jordan’s
a reader understand the relevant opinion is about the fund-raiser?
definition of band?
A She probably thinks the fund-raiser is 4. Y N
A programs not a good idea.
B music B She is probably happy that money
C was raised for the library. 5. Y N
tables
D books
C She is probably angry about
the fund-raiser.
D She is probably afraid to get new 6. Y N
3. What do you think might happen if it materials for the library.
rained during the party?
A Brooke would not play in the band. 7. What indicates that the party will be 7. Y N
a success?
B The money would not be given to
the library. A It rains on the day of the party.
C The party would be held outside. 8. Y N
B People stay up all night the night
D People would go inside and have the before the party.
party there. C A few students go to the party.
D When Brooke gets to the school, ___ / 8
4. Which statement reflects a purpose there are already people there.
for reading this text? Total
A I want to learn how to cook for 8. Which is a theme in this text?

my friends.
B I want to find out why someone would
A determination
throw a blowout block party. B dishonesty
C I want to see a map of a block party. C discrimination
D I want to know where my own block D conceitedness
party is in my neighborhood.
WEEK 2
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “The Blowout Block Party.” Then, read the prompt and
Directions respond on the lines below.
SCORE
___ / 4
What kind of fund-raiser would you plan for your school? Write about what you would
do for your fund-raiser, and where the money would go.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 3
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
If you watch television, you have probably seen advertisements. In fact, the average kid
sees 20,000 televised ads every year! And that doesn’t include the ads that you see on
the Internet and in magazines. Why are they there, and how do they get there? The basic 1. Y N
purpose of ads is to get you to buy products or services. Companies know that people
watch television, and they want people to watch their ads. They also know that it can be
very expensive to make TV shows. So they find out which TV shows are the most popular
2. Y N
shows. Then, companies pay the people who make those TV shows to show their ads. The
people who make TV shows then use that money to pay for making the shows.
3. Y N
1. What is the main purpose of 4. Which word has the same root word
advertisements? as the noun products?
4. Y N
A to be on television A prefabricate
B to get you to buy products or services B pore
C to be on the Internet C prompt 5. Y N
D to pay for TV shows D produce
2. Which statement is not true? 5. Which word has the same meaning
___ / 5
as purpose?
A Companies want people to watch Total
their ads. A work
B The people who make TV shows B history
use the money from ads to make C picture
their shows.
C Most kids do not see many ads.
D reason
D Companies know that it can be

expensive to make TV shows.
3. Which is the definition of average in

this text?
A typical
B largest
C smallest
D unusual

WEEK 3
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Companies want their ads to bring them lots of customers. So they pay the people who
make TV shows to put their ads on the shows. But creating ads and paying the people
1. Y N
who make TV shows is expensive. So companies want to be certain they choose shows
that are popular with their target market. A target market is the group of people a company
thinks will be most likely to buy its product or service. For instance, suppose a company
2. Y N makes snacks for kids. Kids like you are that company’s target market. Now, suppose that
company creates a new snack and makes an ad for the new product. The company wants to
be sure that its target market sees the ad, so it carefully selects TV shows that kids like you
watch. Those are the shows the company uses for its ads.
3. Y N
4. Y N
1. What is this text about? 4. Which sentence below uses the word
target as an adjective?
A how to make a good ad
B how to make a TV show
A The teacher wanted to target
counting as an important skill.
5. Y N
C how companies choose where to put B I see the target across the field.
their ads
D snacks for kids
C The soldier hit his target.
D Our target date for moving is
___ / 5 September 1st.
Total
2. Which title would help a reader
understand the main idea?
5. When the author claims that a
A Watching TV company is certain of something,
what does that mean?
B Ads for Dollars
C Money Talks A The company is sure.
D Targeted Advertisements B The company is confused.
C The company is careful.
3. Which two words are synonyms? D The company is busy.
A new and snack

B certain and carefully
C make and create
D product and service

WEEK 3
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Companies want to be sure that their target markets see their ads. So they carefully
select shows that are popular with their target markets. But how do they know which shows
to choose? Companies often use information they get from Nielsen Media Research. That 1. Y N
is a company that collects information on what people watch on TV. Some people keep
Nielsen TV diaries where they write down what they watch. Some people use Nielsen
People Meters. People Meters are placed on all televisions in a participant’s home to
keep track of all the shows watched in the household. Nielsen Media Research gathers 2. Y N
information on how many people watch each TV show. It also gathers information on the
kinds of people who watch each show. That information helps companies decide where to
place their ads.
3. Y N
1. How do companies know which 3. Which word is a synonym 4. Y N

shows are popular with their for gathers?
target markets?
A discards
A They often use information from B collects
5. Y N
Nielsen Media Research.
B They try to guess which shows
C shows
are popular. D asks
C They talk to people to ask which ___ / 5
shows they watch.
4. What does the verb place mean Total
D They do not know which shows in the following sentence: That
are popular. information helps companies decide
where to place their ads.
2. What is Nielsen Media Research? A finish
A a company that creates TV shows

B locate
B a company that makes and sells

C invest
TV sets D put
C a company that gathers information
on what people watch on TV
5. Which word has a meaning similar
D a company that sells products and to select?
services on TV
A carefully
B choose
C place
D keep

WEEK 3
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Commercial Break
Advertisements are everywhere. Every time you watch a TV show, use the Internet, or read a
magazine, you see them. Some ads are funny, some are beautiful, and some are action-packed.
But all of them have one important purpose: to get you to buy a product or service. Ads can be
useful. For instance, that is how stores let you know when they are having sales. Ads also let
you know about new products or services. Without ads, you might not know about those things.
Ads are important for companies, too—that’s how they reach customers.
When you see an ad, it is important to remember why it is there. The company that made
the ad wants you to buy that product or service. The ad is made so that when you see it, you
will want to buy. For example, ads for restaurants are designed to make you feel hungry for the
food in the ad. Ads for clothes are
designed so that you will want to buy
those clothes. Ads for cell phones
and music players are designed so
that you will believe you are missing
out if you don’t have those things. It is
important to think carefully and make
up your own mind before you buy.
Don’t buy something just because an
ad says that you should.
How do companies create ads that

get people to buy things? They start
with a product or service they want
to sell. Then, they figure out what
special thing that product or service
has that will make people want to buy
it. It might be a low price, a particular
taste, or something else. Then,
companies design ads that tell people
about that special thing. The ads use
color, sound, and other things to get
people’s attention. When the ads are
finished, some companies show them
to a group of people and get their
opinions. If people like what they see,
those companies use the ads they
created. If people don’t like what they
see, the ads are changed.

WEEK 3
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Commercial Break” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What do the title and photograph 5. Before they create an ad, companies
indicate about this text?
A show it to people to get their opinions. 1. Y N
A It describes how to set up a TV. B tell people about a product or service.
B It describes TV ads. C create a product or service to sell.
C It is about moving to a new place. D change the ad if people don’t like it.
2. Y N
D It explains things to do outdoors.
6. Which sentence reflects an opinion? 3. Y N

2. Which is not a way in which ads can
be useful? A The company that made the ad
wants you to buy that product
A Companies use ads to find out what or service. 4. Y N
people want to buy. B Without ads, you might not know
B Companies use ads to reach about those things.
their customers. C 5. Y N
Some ads are funny, some
C Ads publicize sales. are beautiful, and some are
D action-packed.
Ads introduce new products
and services. D The ads use color, sound, and other 6. Y N
things to get people’s attention.
3. What is likely the author’s opinion?

7. Which of these summarizes the 7. Y N
A Companies use ads poorly. second paragraph?
B Ads are important, and you should A Ads can make you hungry.
believe what they say. 8. Y N
C There should be no ads.
B Companies design ads that make
you want to buy things.
D Ads are important tools, but it is C Ads are designed to make you want
important to make up your own mind.
to buy a new pair of jeans.
___ / 8
D Ads keep you from missing out.
4. What can you infer when you see an Total
ad for a new style of jeans?
8. What might a restaurant’s ad share?
A Everyone should wear jeans.
B Those jeans are the best jeans.
A how good the food tastes
C You really need new jeans.

B where you can find shoes
D The company wants you to buy

C how many people they employ
their jeans. D how to make the restaurant’s food

WEEK 3
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Commercial Break.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
Directions the lines below.
SCORE
___ / 4
What kinds of ads get your attention? Why? Describe the kinds of ads you
notice most.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 4
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Jared was planning to play basketball with some of his friends. His mom said he could,
but she insisted that he take his little brother, Max, with him. Max was only five years old,
and Jared was afraid that he would slow everyone down. He was embarrassed to even think 1. Y N
about that. But Jared’s mom repeated that Max would have to go along with Jared; she had
some errands she needed to do, and Max couldn’t remain at home alone. “Besides,” Mom
added, “Max doesn’t want to be left out. He admires you, you know.”
2. Y N
Jared was aware of that, but it wasn’t very comforting. He reluctantly told Max that he was
going to play basketball and that Max could join him. Max was so excited to go that Jared
couldn’t stay upset for long.
3. Y N
1. Initially, how does Jared feel about 4. What does the adverb reluctantly
4. Y N
taking Max with him? tell the reader?
A embarrassed A Jared is happy about talking to Max.

B excited B Jared does not want to tell Max 5. Y N
C where he is going.
curious
D jealous
C Jared cannot hear Max.
D Jared does not know where Max is.
___ / 5
2. Which word best describes Jared?
Total
A annoyed for remain?
B angry A work
C cooperative B leave
D irresponsible C stay
D travel
3. Which word or phrase
means admire?
A ride
B dislike
C look up to
D follow

WEEK 4
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Jared often met his friends after school and on the weekends to play basketball. They
would play until it was time to go home for dinner. But today, Jared wasn’t looking forward
1. Y N
to playing basketball. His mom had insisted that he take his little brother, Max, with him,
and Jared wasn’t happy about it. When he first told Max that he could go along, Max was
so excited that Jared couldn’t stay unhappy about it. But now, on the way to the basketball
2. Y N court, it was all coming back. What was he going to do with Max while he played basketball?
Jared was so preoccupied that he didn’t even notice when they got to the basketball court.
Then he looked up and couldn’t believe what he saw—there were three other little kids Max’s
age! Jared wasn’t the only kid who had brought his younger sibling along. Now, he wouldn’t
3. Y N have to worry about what Max would do while he played.
4. Y N
1. Why does Jared bring Max to the 4. What does the verb insisted tell
basketball court? you in the sentence: His mom had
insisted that he take his little brother,
5. Y N
A His mom insisted that he bring Max. Max, with him, and Jared wasn't
happy about it?
B Max begged to go along.
C Jared’s friends want to meet Max. A She didn’t know where Jared was.
D Jared’s teacher says he should B She didn’t notice Max.
___ / 5 bring Max. C She asked Jared if he wanted to
Total take Max.
2. How is Jared’s problem solved? D She said Jared had to take Max.
A It starts to rain, so nobody can

play basketball. 5. What is the meaning of the phrase
it was all coming back?
B Jared decides not to play basketball.
C Max decides to go home. A Jared and Max are going back home.
D There are other kids Max’s age at the B The basketball court is
basketball court. going somewhere.
C Jared remembers why he
was unhappy.
for preoccupied? D Jared forgets where he and Max
are going.
A sad
B joyful
C worried
D furious

WEEK 4
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Jared and his friends played basketball as often as they could. The basketball court they
used had a fence all around it and a solid gate. During the day, the gate was unlocked so 1. Y N
that players could come in and play basketball. At night, the gate was locked for safety.
Today, Jared was bringing his little brother, Max, to the basketball court for the first time.
Some of Jared’s friends had brought their little brothers and sisters, too. When Jared and
Max got to the basketball court, Jared was surprised to see all of his friends outside the 2. Y N
gate. “The gate’s locked,” one of Jared’s friends said. “We can’t get in to play.” Everyone
looked at one another in dismay. It looked as though there would be no basketball that day.
3. Y N
1. What is the setting of the text? 4. What does the adjective solid
indicate about the gate? 4. Y N
A Jared’s home
B the cafeteria
A It is strong.
C the basketball court

B It is locked. 5. Y N
D the swimming pool

C It is easy to open.
D It is tall.
2. Which repeated word in the text

___ / 5
indicates the setting? 5. Which of these is another way to say
looked as though? Total
A brothers
B gate
A worked at
C court
B promised
D play
C looked at
D seemed that
3. What does the word dismay tell

readers about the characters?
A They are unhappy.

B They are excited.
C They are jealous.
D They are joyful.

WEEK 4
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Little Brother, Big Help!

Jared’s mom had insisted that he bring his little brother, Max, to the basketball court where
Jared planned to meet his friends. Jared was reluctant to bring Max, but he didn’t have a choice,
so he trudged to the basketball court with Max happily skipping at his side. To Jared’s relief, a
few of his friends had brought their little brothers and sisters, too, so at least Max would have
some kids his own age to occupy him during the game. Then, Jared noticed what the others had
already seen: The gate into the basketball court was locked.
For a few minutes, everyone waited helplessly, trying to figure out what to do. Then, from
around the corner strode Mr. Giles, the maintenance manager at the community center where
the basketball court was located. Mr. Giles hastily approached the boys and said apologetically,
“Sorry I’m behind schedule today, guys. I had a flat tire.” He unhooked a bunch of keys from his
belt and reached over to unlock the gate. But instead, Mr. Giles accidentally dropped the keys
on the other side of the fence!
There was a long silence. Then Max piped up, “I can get them.” Everyone ignored him until
he repeated himself, this time more loudly.
When he finally heard Max, Jared snapped,

“How can you possibly help?”
Max simply answered, “Watch what I can

do.” He dropped to the ground and squirmed
underneath the gate. Within a minute, he had
emerged on the opposite side. He grabbed
the keys and passed them through to Jared,
who returned them to Mr. Giles. In seconds,
Mr. Giles had the gate unlocked. The boys
trooped onto the basketball court, calling out
their thanks to Mr. Giles as they surged toward
the net.
Mr. Giles responded, “Don’t thank me. Max

is the one who saved the day. He was the only
one small enough to squeeze under that gate.”
After that, Jared resolved to never again think
of his brother as an inconvenience.

WEEK 4
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Little Brother, Big Help!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Why does Max repeat himself? 5. How does Mr. Giles likely feel about
dropping the keys?
A Nobody is there at first. 1. Y N
B He does not know how to talk.

A excited
C Everyone ignores him at first.

B curious
D Jared tells him to be quiet.

C proud 2. Y N
D embarrassed
2. What do context clues indicate the 3. Y N

meaning of the word fl at in the text? 6. What can the reader infer about
the weather?
A smooth
B level
A It is too windy to go outside. 4. Y N
C lacking excitement
B It is snowy and freezing.
D not full of air

C It is cold and rainy.
5. Y N
D It is warm and sunny.
3. Which will likely happen the

next time Jared and his friends 7. Which is a theme in this text? 6. Y N
play basketball?
A uncertainty
A Jared will not tell Max he is going to B helpfulness
play basketball. 7. Y N
B Jared will bring Max with him.

C sorrow
C Jared will not play basketball.

D jealousy
8. Y N
D Jared will be very angry with Max.
8. Which summarizes the problem in
the text?
4. Which reflects a purpose for reading
this text, based on the title? A The gate is locked. ___ / 8
A I want to learn about helping my
B The basketball is missing. Total
own brother. C Jared has a broken leg.
B I am curious about how the little D The boys are not allowed to
brother becomes a big help. play basketball.
C I want to read about a real brother
who helps someone.
D I want to find out why brothers do not
get along and help each other.

WEEK 4
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Little Brother, Big Help!” Then, read the prompt and respond
Directions on the lines below.
SCORE
___ / 4
Do you have brothers or sisters? Has someone younger than you ever helped you?
Write about a time your brother, sister, or a friend helped you.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 5
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
The United States government has three branches: the legislative branch, the judicial
branch, and the executive branch. The legislative branch makes and passes laws. It also
1. Y N
coins money and has other powers. The judicial branch can stop a law if it is not fair or if it
goes against the Constitution. It also makes decisions in some court cases. The executive
branch runs the country and executes, or carries out, laws. The executive branch is headed
by the president, who has special powers. For instance, Congress makes and passes 2. Y N
laws. But those laws do not go into effect until the president signs them. The president also
has veto power. That means the president can stop a law if it is not a good law. All three
branches must work together. They do that so that no branch becomes too powerful. This is
called the system of checks and balances. 3. Y N
1. What is something the president 4. Which of these sentences has a 4. Y N

can do? compound predicate?
A make decisions in some court cases A This is called the system of checks
and balances. 5. Y N
B make and pass laws
C veto laws
B The president also has veto power.
D coin money
C The executive branch runs the
country and executes, or carries
out, laws. ___ / 5
2. Who is the head of the D It also makes decisions in some Total
executive branch? court cases.
A Congress
B the president
5. Which word means the power to stop
a law?
C the judicial branch
D A the Constitution
checks and balances
B the president
3. Which definition of execute is used in

C Congress
this text? D veto
A carry out
B kill
C write
D get rid of

WEEK 5
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
The president has many powers. For example, laws do not go into effect until the
1. Y N president signs them. And the president can veto laws if they are not good laws. The
president is also the commander in chief of the troops. This means that the president
is in charge of the military. The president also chooses ambassadors. An ambassador
represents the United States in other countries. The president also names justices to the
2. Y N Supreme Court. Congress must confirm, or agree with, those choices. The president can
veto a law. But Congress can override that veto. That means Congress can vote for a law
even if the president vetoes it. There are limits to what the president can do.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which word from the text is not
4. Y N a verb?
A what the president can do
B what the Supreme Court does
A choose
5. Y N C what ambassadors do
B confirm
D how a veto works

C ambassador
D override
___ / 5 2. Which statement is true?

5. Which has the same meaning as
Total A The president can override a veto. agree with?
B The president chooses justices. A choose
C The president’s power has no limits. B veto
D The president is not in charge of C confirm
the military.
D vote
3. Who represents the United States in

other countries?
A a veto
B the commander in chief
C a justice
D an ambassador

WEEK 5
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
To be elected president, a person must be at least thirty-five years old. The president
must also have been born in the United States. Finally, the president must have lived in the 1. Y N
United States for at least fourteen years. These rules are in the Constitution. The president
serves for four years. That is called one term. Presidents can be in office for only two terms.
The president lives and works in the White House in Washington, DC. Part of the White
House is living quarters for the president and the president’s family. Many people beside 2. Y N
the president work in the White House, so many rooms in the White House are used for
meetings and offices. If you visit Washington, DC, you can take a tour of the White House.
3. Y N
1. Where can you find the rules about 4. Which verb means elected?
who can be president? 4. Y N
A served
A in the White House B called
B in the Constitution C born 5. Y N
C in the term D chosen
D in the office
5. What does the word quarters mean ___ / 5

2. Which word or phrase reflects the in the text?
main idea? Total
A rooms where people reside
A Constitution B coins
B Washington, DC C periods of time in a sporting event
C president D one-fourth
D White House
3. What is a four-year presidential

job called?
A Constitution
B White House
C a term
D quarters

WEEK 5
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
The Executive Branch

The president is the head of the executive branch of the U.S. government. But the president
is only one part of it. There are many other people in that branch. For example, the vice
president is a member of that branch. The vice president works with the president and also with
Congress. The president also has a team of experts. Those people are called the president’s
cabinet. Each person in the cabinet is an expert in one area. For instance, there is an expert on
education. There is also an expert on other countries. There are other experts in the cabinet,
too. The experts in the cabinet meet with the president. They give the president advice and
special information. The president makes a lot of very difficult decisions, so that information
is important.
The president also gets a lot of help and advice from the people who work at the White
House. For example, the president has a press secretary who talks to television and newspaper
reporters. The press secretary’s job is to tell those reporters what the president is doing. Then,
the reporters tell people who read and watch the news. The president also works with people
who help make policies. A policy is a set of rules and ways of doing things. Other advisors
also work with the president and provide information. That way, the president can make
smart decisions.
The president is a very busy person. So, there are people at the White House who help plan
what the president does. There are also people who help the president prepare speeches.
Other people do other jobs at the White House, such as answering letters and telephone calls.
When you think of the executive branch of our government, you may think of the president. And
the president leads that branch. But as you can see, the president can’t run the government
alone. The president depends on many people to get the job done.
The White House

WEEK 5
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “The Executive Branch” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What do the title and picture help 5. Why does the president need a
readers to predict? group of experts?
1. Y N
A This text is about the executive A The experts work very hard.
branch of government. B The experts make the decisions.
B This text is about a leader of C The president needs to talk to 2. Y N
a business.
TV reporters.
C This text is about a large house. D The president needs their information
D This text is about the workplace. to make decisions. 3. Y N
2. What is a policy? 6. Which of the following is an opinion?

4. Y N
A a room in the White House A The president is friendly with
B his advisors.
politics
C a set of rules and ways of
B The president depends on 5. Y N
many people.
doing things
D the president’s agenda
C The cabinet helps the president
make decisions.
6. Y N
D The president is the head of the
3. What is the author’s purpose? executive branch.
A to tell about all of our presidents 7. Y N
B to get you to visit the White House

7. What might happen if the president
did not have a cabinet?
C to tell about the executive branch
D A The executive branch would be big. 8. Y N
to tell a personal story
B It would be harder for the president to
make smart decisions.
4. Which statement is a reasonable
C There would be no press secretary.
conclusion about the vice president?
D ___ / 8
There would be no executive branch.
A He or she visits Congress often. Total
B He or she doesn’t work hard.
8. Which is true about the
C He or she lives far from Washington. White House?
D He or she doesn’t know the president. A The president works there.
B The president lives there.
C There are many offices there.
D all of the above
WEEK 5
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “The Executive Branch.” Then, read the prompt and respond
SCORE
___ / 4
What are some things that you would do if you were the president? Write about what
you would do.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 6
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Ashley loved music and talking about music. So when her friend Tara mentioned an
online music chat group, Ashley wanted to join it. Ashley talked to her parents about the
group, too. At first, they didn’t want her to join. They explained that online chat groups 1. Y N
can be very dangerous for kids. But Ashley kept begging, and finally, her mom and dad
consented. They told her that she could join, but she could only enter the chat room when
one of them was home. Ashley didn’t like that rule at all. Her mom and dad explained that
2. Y N
it was important for Ashley to be safe. So she agreed to follow their rule and only enter the
chat room when an adult was home. At least she would get the chance to talk to other kids
who loved music as much as she did.
3. Y N
1. How does Ashley find out about the 4. What does the verb begging tell
chat room? the reader? 4. Y N
A Her mom tells her about it. A Ashley really wants to join the
B chat room.
Her friend Tara mentions it. 5. Y N
C Her dad tells her about it.
B Ashley doesn’t care about the
chat room.
D She finds it online. C Ashley is angry with her mom
and dad.
___ / 5
2. Which title would hint at the text’s D Ashley has never met Tara.
main idea? Total
A Online Safety 5. What does mention mean?

B Chatting in Rooms A talk about
C A Tough Choice B ignore
D Following School Rules C read about
D listen to
3. What is the definition of the
word consented?
A asked questions
B yelled
C refused
D gave permission

WEEK 6
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Ashley’s parents had allowed her to join an online music chat group. At first, they had
been reluctant to let her join. Chat rooms can be dangerous for kids because it is very
1. Y N
hard to tell who someone really is when you are online. But Ashley promised to be careful,
and she was. She only entered the chat room when her mom or dad was home. She did
not give anyone her telephone number or address, and she didn’t post pictures of herself,
2. Y N either. She was also careful about what she said in the chat room. And she loved having
the chance to talk about music. She found a lot of kids in the chat room who loved music
just as much as she did. They talked about bands, concerts, and music lessons, and they
suggested songs to one another.
3. Y N
1. What does Ashley do to be 4. Which word is a synonym

4. Y N careful online? for allowed?
A She talks about bands and concerts. A permitted

5. Y N B She joins a chat room. B denied
C She does not join the chat room. C asked
D She does not give anyone her D required
telephone number.
___ / 5
5. What do the phrases post pictures
Total 2. What do Ashley and the people in and suggested songs exemplify?
her chat group love to talk about?
A similes
A sports B metaphors
B music C alliteration
C math D personification
D books
3. What does post mean in this text?
A to mail
B a piece of wood
C a job
D to display online

WEEK 6
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Ashley was a member of an online music chat group. She got a lot of music news from
the other members of the group, and she shared music news, too. She and her group also
1. Y N
talked about bands, singers, and concerts. One day, everyone in the group was talking
about some very big news. A band called Seven Wonders was going to release a new CD.
Lots of kids in the group, including Ashley, were fans of Seven Wonders and couldn’t wait to
get their new music. Ashley saved up her allowance for three weeks. She wanted to have 2. Y N
enough money to buy the new CD when it was released. The other kids in her online chat
group were just as excited. Everyone talked about how amazing their music was.
3. Y N
1. How will Ashley pay for the CD she 4. Which part of speech is the word her
wants to buy? in the sentence: Ashley saved up her
allowance for three weeks. 4. Y N
A Ashley’s mom and dad will buy it
for her. A an adjective
B She is saving up her allowance. B a possessive pronoun 5. Y N
C Her online chat group will buy it C an auxiliary verb

for her. D a predicate
D She will not buy the CD.
___ / 5
5. What is the meaning of the phrase
2. Which title would best fit this text? just as? Total
A Seven Wonders Release A not

B Ashley’s Friends B less
C Online Talk C equally
D Concert Chat D fair
3. Which definition of release is used in

this text?
A dismiss
B rent or lease again
C free or let out
D make available for sale

WEEK 6
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Who’s in the Room?

Ashley was very excited. Seven Wonders, one of her favorite bands, had just released a new
CD. She had saved up her money, and she was ready to buy the CD when it was released this
weekend. She talked about the music with her online music chat group. A lot of the other kids
in the group were going to buy the CD, too. In fact, that was the main thing everyone in the chat
room was talking about one afternoon.
All of a sudden, Ashley got a chat message from Stephanie, one of the kids in the chat room.
The message said that Stephanie wanted to meet Ashley at the mall. Then they could buy the
new CD together. Ashley told her mom about the message, and her mom asked, “Do you know
Stephanie from school?”
“No,” Ashley admitted. “We’ve only chatted online. I don’t think she goes to my school.”
“Listen,” Ashley’s mom said, “I want you to have friends, but sometimes, people online aren’t
who they say they are. And when you’re online, you can’t always tell. So I don’t think it’s a good
idea for you to meet this person.”
“But, Mom,” Ashley pleaded, “what if it is just a kid named Stephanie who wants to buy a CD
with me?”
Ashley's mom considered that for a moment. Then she said, “Let’s do this. Dad and I will go
with you to the mall to buy the CD with Stephanie. If Stephanie really is just a kid who wants
to meet you in person, that’s great. If not,
you’ll be safe.”
Ashley didn’t like that idea. It made her

feel like a baby. But she knew her mom
was right about safety, and besides, she
wouldn’t be allowed to get the CD if she
didn’t agree, so she finally nodded. Then
she answered Stephanie’s message. She
told Stephanie that she and her parents
would be at the mall the next afternoon.
The next day, Ashley went to the mall

with her mom and dad so that she could
get her CD. When Stephanie never showed
up and then disappeared from the chat
room, Ashley knew her parents had been
right to be concerned. She was glad they
were there to take care of her.

WEEK 6
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Who’s in the Room?” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which answers the title’s question, 5. What is the point of view of this text?
who’s in the room?
A first person 1. Y N
A There is music playing in the room. B second person
B Ashley and Stephanie are alone in C third person
the room. 2. Y N
C The room is empty.
D There is no point of view.
D The room is a virtual room online with

unknown visitors. 6. At the end of the text, how does 3. Y N
Ashley feel about her parents going
with her to the mall?
2. What does it mean that two people
chatted online? A She is afraid. 4. Y N
A They talked on the phone.

B She is upset.
B They talked in person.

C She is grateful.
5. Y N
C They communicated on the computer.
D She is jealous.
D They talked by text messages.

7. How would this text be different if 6. Y N
Ashley and Stephanie were in the
3. What do you think will happen the same class?
next time someone wants to meet
Ashley in person? A Stephanie and Ashley would not 7. Y N
know each other.
A Ashley will not tell her parents B Stephanie might tell Ashley not to buy
about it.
the new CD. 8. Y N
B Ashley will meet that person. C Ashley might not want the new CD.
C Ashley will tell her parents about it. D Ashley’s mom might let her go alone
D Ashley will not be concerned about it. to meet Stephanie at the mall.
___ / 8
4. How does Ashley’s mom feel when 8. Which is a lesson from the text? Total
Ashley tells her about Stephanie?
A Parents don’t care about their
A suspicious children's safety.
B bored B It is very important to use caution on
the Internet.
C jealous
D C Chat rooms are fun and informative.
very glad
D Kids should never go to the mall
without their parents.
WEEK 6
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Who’s in the Room?” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
Do you go online? If you do, what do you do to stay safe? Write about how to stay
safe online.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 7
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
What would it be like if library books weren’t put into any kind of order? You probably
wouldn’t be able to find the book you wanted. That is why library books are organized.
1. Y N
Most public libraries separate books for children and teens from books for adults. That way,
children, teens, and adults can find the books they want more easily. Most libraries also
separate fiction books from nonfiction books. Fiction books are alphabetized by the author’s
last name. So if you are looking for a children’s fiction book, begin by going to the children’s 2. Y N
section. Next, look for the fiction books in that section. Finally, search alphabetically for the
last name of the author, and you will likely find the book.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which of these sentences is an

imperative sentence?
A how books are made 4. Y N
B why libraries were invented

A Then, look for the fiction books in
that section.
C how to find a library near you B Fiction books are in alphabetical 5. Y N
D how library books are organized order by the author’s last name.
C Most public libraries separate books
for children and teens from books
2. How are fiction books organized?
for adults.
___ / 5
A by number of pages D What would it be like if library books
weren’t put into any kind of order? Total
B by title, in alphabetical order
C by author’s last name, in
alphabetical order 5. Which word is a synonym for
separate?
D by the number of chapters
A unite
3. Which prefix could be added B divide
to the word organized to make C search
its antonym?
D begin
A dis–
B bi–
C pro–
D con–

WEEK 7
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
One of the best ways to find what you are looking for in a library is to use the library’s
catalogue (KAT-uh-log). Libraries used to have card catalogues, which are groups of
1. Y N
drawers that hold sets of cards. Each card has the title and author of a book. It also tells
you the book’s topic and where it is located. You can search for a book by the title, by the
author’s name, or by the topic. Most libraries now have their catalogues on computers. The
process of looking for a book on the computer is a lot like using a card catalogue. You can
2. Y N
search for a book by author, by title, or by subject. Then, you can go to the section of the
library that has that book and get what you need.
3. Y N
1. Which of these is not a way to 4. Which noun is the location where

search for a book? people can find a library’s list
4. Y N of books?
A by author
B by title
A catalogue
5. Y N C by date
B subject
D by subject
C author
D section
___ / 5 2. What does this text tell readers?

5. What is the phrase looking for
Total A how to get to a local library a book on the computer is a lot
like using a card catalogue an
B how to use a library's catalogue example of?
C what the best books are
D A alliteration
how many libraries there are
B a metaphor

C personification
for process? D a comparison
A catalogue
B book
C method
D library

WEEK 7
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Once you find a book in the catalogue, how do you find it in the library? Many libraries
use the Dewey Decimal System, or DDS. The DDS divides books into ten topics. Each topic
1. Y N
has its own number. You can find each book’s number when you look that book up in the
catalogue. For example, art has the Dewey number of 700, so if you search for a book about
art, you will find that art books have numbers that start with 7. Each topic has topics within
it. Suppose you are interested in drawing. Drawing is a kind of art, and the Dewey number 2. Y N
for books about art is 700, so start at the section of your library labeled “700.” Books about
drawing have the Dewey number of 730. Go to that section of the art books. You will
probably find what you want.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. What does the pronoun it refer to in
the sentence: Once you find a book 4. Y N
A the Dewey Decimal System in the catalogue, how do you find it
in the library?
B art books
C the history of libraries A the library 5. Y N
D how to write a book B the catalogue

C a book
2. Which statement is not true about D you ___ / 5
the DDS?
Total
A It is a way of organizing books. 5. Which of these is an
interrogative sentence?
B It separates books into ten topics.
C Each topic has its own number. A Many libraries use the Dewey
Decimal System, or DDS.
D The DDS has fifteen topics.
B Once you find a book in the
catalogue, how do you find it in
3. Which means look up? the library?
A C You will probably find what you want.

admire
B D Go to that section of the art books.
talk about
C draw
D search for

WEEK 7
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Melvil Dewey
Today, it is easy to find what you want when you go to the library. For that, you can thank
Melvil Dewey. Melvil was born in Adams Center, New York, in 1851. His parents, Joel and Eliza,
owned a general store. He was always interested in books and words. That interest continued
when he went to Amherst College. In 1872, he began working at the college library.
Melvil thought that it was important for people to be educated. He also thought that libraries
could play a big role in teaching people, so he wanted them to be easy to use. At the time, it
was hard for people to use libraries. Books were not organized. So, books on the same subject
might be in several parts of a library. It was hard to find books on one subject because there
was no good way to know which books in a library were about which topics. So Melvil invented
a new system of organizing books. That system is called the Dewey Decimal System (DDS). It
was so successful that many libraries still use it today. It is an easy way to keep track of books
and an easy way to find books.
Melvil did more than invent the DDS. He

wanted libraries and librarians to work together,
so he helped to found the American Library
Association in 1876. He also founded the
Library Journal. Melvil did a lot for librarians.
At the time, there was no place for a person
to learn to be a librarian. So librarians had
to learn on the job as best they could. Melvil
opened the world’s first school for librarians in
1887. He also set up the first traveling library.
Today’s bookmobiles are based on that library.
Melvil Dewey died in 1931, but his work still
helps people use libraries today.
Melvil Dewey

WEEK 7
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Melvil Dewey” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Knowing about which topic will help 5. Which purpose for reading makes
readers better understand this text? the most sense for this topic?
1. Y N
A libraries A to learn about the DDS
B colleges B to learn about the accomplishments
C of Melvil Dewey 2. Y N
stores
D boats
C to learn about bookmobiles
D all of the above
3. Y N
2. What did Melvil do before he
invented the DDS? 6. Which of these is a good word to
describe Melvil?
A He started the first school 4. Y N
for librarians. A organized
B He founded the Library Journal. B athletic
C He founded the American C sloppy 5. Y N
Library Association. D lazy
D He went to Amherst College.
6. Y N
7. Which statement is not an important
3. How did Melvil help solve the idea from the text?
problem of training people to
be librarians? A Organizing books in a library helps 7. Y N
us use the library more effectively.
A He went to Amherst College. B Education was not important to
B He organized library books. Melvil Dewey. 8. Y N
C He became a librarian. C Librarians have benefitted from Melvil
D Dewey’s work.
He started the first school
for librarians. D Successful ideas can help people.
___ / 8
4. Which did Melvil not use to 8. Which of these is a problem that Total
organize libraries? Melvil solved?
A numbers A There were no libraries.

B computers B Libraries had no books.
C labels C Library books were not organized.
D titles D Many people could not read.

WEEK 7
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Melvil Dewey.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
How do you find a library book when you are looking for one? Give an example. Write
about how to find a book in a library.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 8
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Carlos opened the back door of his house to let his puppy, Lucky, back inside. He and his
family had only had Lucky for a few weeks, but Lucky was already learning a lot of things.
As Carlos glanced out at the sky, he saw dark clouds that threatened rain. It was going to 1. Y N
be a very soggy afternoon. The thought of taking Lucky out in the pouring rain made Carlos
think that it would be nice if Lucky had a doghouse. Then, the puppy could have a place
to go to stay dry in the rain and cool in the heat. Carlos looked at doghouses online, but
he couldn’t find one that was exactly right for Lucky. So he decided that he would build a 2. Y N
doghouse himself.
3. Y N
1. How will Carlos solve the problem of 4. What does the verb glanced tell you
not finding a doghouse to buy? about how Carlos looked at the sky?
4. Y N
A He will ask a friend for help. A He stared at the sky for a long time.
B He will go to pet stores. B He looked at the sky very quickly.
C He will not get Lucky a doghouse. C He did not look outside. 5. Y N
D He will build a doghouse himself. D He wanted another puppy.
2. Which chapter title is most 5. Which is the meaning of threatened

appropriate for this text? in this text? ___ / 5
A A Total
Wet Lucky bullied
B Carlos Gets an Idea B warned
C A Rainy Day C removed
D A Boy and His Puppy D protected
3. Which word is a synonym for soggy?
A parched
B damp
C very wet
D cloudy

WEEK 8
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Carlos wanted his puppy, Lucky, to have a doghouse, but he hadn’t been able to find
exactly what he wanted online. So he decided that the best idea would be to build a
1. Y N
doghouse himself. Carlos had not done a project like that before, and he knew he would
need help. So he asked his dad about building a doghouse. Carlos’s dad suggested that
they look at some websites for building a doghouse. He also thought it would be a good
2. Y N idea to go to a building-supply store and ask some questions. People there would probably
have helpful advice. Carlos agreed. Together, they visited some do-it-yourself websites.
They also visited a few local home-improvement stores. Soon, they knew what supplies they
would need to build a doghouse.
3. Y N
4. Y N
1. Which action does Carlos take to get 4. Which word is a conjunction in the
help with his doghouse? sentence: Carlos hadn’t done a
project like that before, and he knew
A He asks the vet about doghouses. he would need some help.
5. Y N B He talks to his friends. A project

C He asks his dad about building B and
a doghouse.
D He takes a class on
C hadn’t
___ / 5 building doghouses. D some
Total
2. How do the characters discover 5. What does exactly mean?
what supplies they will need for
a doghouse? A precisely
A They visit a few local

B nearly
home-improvement stores. C the opposite of
B They ask a friend. D happily
C They ask Carlos’s teacher.
D They visit a local animal shelter.
3. What does the word local mean?
A enormous
B new
C expensive
D nearby

WEEK 8
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Carlos and his father went to The Fix-It Place, a local home-improvement store, to get
supplies for making a doghouse. They made a list of what they would need so they wouldn’t 1. Y N
forget anything. The first thing they would need was wood. They would need solid lumber
for the frame of the doghouse, and plywood, a kind of thin wooden board, for the walls. They
were also going to need nails, paint, and some other supplies. As they went through the
store, they checked their list and put what they needed into their shopping cart. Finally, they 2. Y N
had all their supplies. Carlos was really beginning to get excited about this project. He knew
it would be a challenge, but he was looking forward to getting started.
3. Y N
1. Where does this text take place? 4. Which word is a synonym

for supplies?
A at a park
4. Y N
B at school
A materials
C in Carlos’s backyard
B boards
5. Y N
D at The Fix-It Place
C lists
D improvements
2. Which will Carlos not need to build

the doghouse? 5. Which word signals that the action of ___ / 5
the text is ending?
A nails
Total
B paint
A started
C tile
B finally
D lumber
C forget
D supplies
3. What is a kind of thin wooden board?
A a list
B a frame
C plywood
D paint

WEEK 8
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
the Doghouse
Carlos and his father were about to build a doghouse for their puppy, Lucky. Carlos wanted
Lucky to have a place to stay dry when it rained and stay cool when it was hot. Carlos and his
dad had gone to The Fix-It Place to get their supplies, and now they were ready to begin the
project. Carlos’s dad explained that the first thing they would need to do would be to measure
Lucky. The doghouse would have to be big enough so Lucky could turn around and lie down,
and big enough to hold food and water.
After they measured Lucky, it was time to build the frame. Carlos and his dad used strong
boards for the frame so the doghouse would be sturdy. Then, they measured and cut plywood
for the walls and floor. They also made sure to cut an opening that was big enough for Lucky to
go in and out. Once they attached it to the frame, it was time to start working on the roof.
Carlos and his dad started with strong boards for the roof frame, and then they used other
boards for the rafters. They used plywood to complete the shape of the roof. The roof would
need to protect Lucky from rain and too much sun, so they also put shingles on the roof. Carlos
thought the doghouse roof looked a lot like the roof of his own house—it even had the same
shape. His dad explained that the pitched roof would help the rain fall off the roof instead of
collecting on top of it.
Finally, the doghouse was ready to be decorated. Carlos painted it bright red, and painted
Lucky’s name above the door. As a finishing touch, Carlos put a piece of carpet and a blanket
in the doghouse. Lucky was going to be a comfortable puppy! Carlos couldn’t believe how good
the doghouse looked. He was glad he had thought of this idea.

WEEK 8
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “The Doghouse” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. How does Carlos’s dad likely feel 5. What is the point of view of this text?
when the doghouse is done?
A first person 1. Y N
A angry B second person
B proud C third person
C suspicious D There is no point of view.
2. Y N
D unsure
6. According to the author’s tone, 3. Y N

2. Why do Carlos and his dad have to how will Lucky likely feel about
start by measuring Lucky? the doghouse?
A Lucky has gotten very big. A He will not fit. 4. Y N
B Lucky is afraid of the doghouse. B He will refuse to go inside.

C They want the doghouse to be the C He will like it.
right size. 5. Y N
D He will not see it.
D They want to make the doghouse
very small.
7. What problem do Carlos and his 6. Y N
dad solve?
3. What do you think might have
happened if they had built the A Lucky is too big for his doghouse.
roof first? 7. Y N
B Lucky does not have a place to stay
A out of the rain and the heat.
The roof might be made of paper.
B It might not rain.
C Lucky does not know how to
go downstairs. 8. Y N
C Carlos and his dad might not have D Carlos is afraid of dogs.
built the rest of the doghouse.
D The roof might not be the right size.
8. What theme is communicated in
___ / 8
this text?
4. What can you infer about Carlos Total
based on the text? A Hard work can be rewarding.
A He likes dogs.
B Dogs do not make good pets.
B He likes baseball.
C It is better to work alone than
with help.
C He does not like to make things. D There is not much planning involved
D He does not live in a house. with building projects.

WEEK 8
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “The Doghouse.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
If you were going to build something, what would you build? Write about the supplies
you would use and how you would build the object.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 9
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Your body does a lot of things amazingly well. But as incredible as your body is, it can still
be attacked by germs. Germs can invade your body, and until your body gets rid of them,
you feel sick. There are many different kinds of germs, and all of them are too small for you 1. Y N
to see without a microscope. One kind of germ is bacteria (bak-TEER-ee-uh). Bacteria are
one-celled forms of life. They can grow outside the body, but they can also grow inside the
body. Ear infections and strep throat are caused by bacteria. Food poisoning is also caused
2. Y N
by bacteria. Some bacteria are actually good for your body. They help you digest what you
eat and drink. But many kinds of bacteria can make you very sick.
3. Y N
1. What is the text mostly about? 4. Which sentence is a

passive sentence?
A bacteria 4. Y N
B how your body grows

A But many kinds of bacteria can make
you very sick.
C microscopes B Food poisoning is also caused 5. Y N
D cells by bacteria.
C Your body does a lot of things
amazingly well.
2. How does this text feature help a
reader: (bak-TEER-ee-uh)? D Bacteria are one-celled forms of life.
___ / 5
A It tells readers a word’s part Total
of speech. 5. Which word describes one-celled
forms of life?
B It tells readers how to spell a word.
C It tells readers how to pronounce A microscopes
a word. B bodies
D It tells readers how to write a word. C bacteria
D ear infections
3. What does the prefix micro– tell you
about a microscope?
A It lets you see very large things.

B It lets you see very small things.
C It lets you see orange things.
D It lets you see square things.

WEEK 9
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
There are a few types of germs that can invade your body and make you sick. Some of
those germs are viruses. Viruses are a little different from bacteria. While bacteria are
1. Y N
one-celled forms of life, viruses are not. In fact, many scientists don’t consider viruses to be
alive until they are in a cell. That is because viruses need to be inside a cell to grow. When
a virus gets inside a cell, it uses that cell as a host and lives on the nutrients in the cell.
2. Y N
Then, it reproduces itself and makes more viruses. Those viruses invade more cells and
use them as hosts. Viruses are smaller than bacteria, but they can still make you very sick.
Most colds are caused by viruses. Viruses cause the flu, chicken pox, and measles, too.
3. Y N
1. Which index entry would include 4. What is the phrase inside a cell an
this text? example of?
4. Y N
A doctors A conjunction
B kinds of germs B predicate
5. Y N C nutrition C subject
D hosting a party D prepositional phrase
___ / 5 2. Which word in the text is important to 5. Which word has the same meaning
know and could be shown in bold or as invade?
Total italicized print?
A attack
A sick B grow
B bacteria C feed
C chicken pox D study
D viruses

for reproduce?
A remove
B copy
C erase
D move

WEEK 9
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Viruses and bacteria can make you very sick. But there are several things you can do
to prevent a lot of them from invading your body. One important thing to do is wash your
1. Y N
hands. Many viruses can live on doorknobs. They can also live on telephones, remote
controls, and computer keyboards. If you touch those things, you can get germs on your
hands. So wash your hands, especially before you eat and after you use the bathroom.
Germs are contagious. If your friends are sick, wait until they are well again before you visit. 2. Y N
And if you are sick, wait until you are well before spending time with your friends.
3. Y N
1. Which title best fits the text? 4. Which prefix could be added to the
word visit to make a word that means
A What to Do if You Are Sick visit again?
4. Y N
B How to Cook Your Food Properly A pre–
C Where Viruses Live B re–
D How to Keep from Spreading Germs C non–
5. Y N
D un–
2. Which is a true statement about
this topic?
5. What does the word ___ / 5
A Germs cannot spread from one contagious mean?
person to another. Total
B You can do several things to prevent
A unhealthy
germs from making you sick. B disgusting
C Washing your hands isn’t C can be passed around
very important. D moves quickly
D Bacteria cannot grow on food.
3. Which word is an antonym

of prevent?
A stop
B open
C permit
D operate

WEEK 9
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Stop the Invaders

Even if you take good care of your body, you can still get sick sometimes. Germs can invade
even a healthy body! Getting sick can make you feel miserable, but there are some things that
you can do to help yourself get better quickly and be more comfortable.
The first thing to do when you are not feeling well is to let your parents know. Sometimes it is
hard to tell whether you have a cold, the flu, or something more serious. So your parents may
take you to the doctor. Your doctor can do tests that will let you know what is making you sick.
You may be sick because of bacteria. Strep throat is an example of an illness caused by
bacteria. If bacteria has made you sick, your doctor will give you antibiotics. Antibiotics are
medicines that are designed to help your body get rid of the bacteria that is making you sick. It
is important to take all of the medicine the doctor gives you because your body needs all of the
medicine in order to kill the germs. It is also important to get plenty of rest because your body
needs rest to heal. Drinking plenty of liquids such as water and juice also helps.
Your doctor may tell you that you have a virus, like the flu. If you do, the best thing to do is
get plenty of rest. Even if you are not asleep, rest as much as you can. It is also important to
drink lots of fluids. Water, juice, and soup are especially good for you. Your parents can give you
medicine for your fever and aches. Tell your parents if you start to feel a lot worse or if you have
trouble breathing. They will take you back to the doctor.
If you have a cold, there are

things you can do to be more
comfortable. Warm liquids like
chicken soup soothe your throat
and help clear your nose. Liquids
such as juice and water are very
helpful, too. You can also help
soothe your throat and clear
your sinuses with a hot bath or a
shower. And don’t forget to blow
your nose frequently—that will
help your body get rid of mucus,
too. Germs can invade anyone’s
body, but you can help your body
fight back.

WEEK 9
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Stop the Invaders” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is an example of bacteria 5. Which is a purpose for reading
making you sick? this text?
1. Y N
A cold A to learn how to find a good doctor
B the wrong medicine B to learn how to become a doctor
C strep throat C to learn how to make your own juice 2. Y N
D a broken leg D to learn how to take care of yourself

when you are sick
3. Y N
2. What does it mean for germs to
invade your body? 6. What might happen if you do not
finish all of an antibiotic?
A Germs make you hot. 4. Y N
B Germs get inside your body.

A You might get better more quickly.
C Germs are only in animal bodies.

B You might not kill all the bacteria and
you could get sick again. 5. Y N
D Germs only go into your body C You might sleep better at night.
through your nose.
D You might get very hungry.
6. Y N
3. What does the author likely want the
reader to do? 7. What should you do when you
feel sick?
A avoid medicine 7. Y N
B drink very little water

A Tell your parents and then try to get
a lot of rest.
C get the flu B Get extra exercise. 8. Y N
D feel better more quickly when he or C Get up early and go to school.
she is sick
D Tell the doctor that you feel fine.
4. Why might a doctor need to do tests

___ / 8
to find out what is making you sick? 8. Why is it important to get a lot of rest
when you are sick? Total
A You may have the flu, but feel fine.
B Sometimes it is hard to tell what is
A Your body does not need much rest
when you are sick.
causing your symptoms.
C You may have strep throat, but not
B Rest helps you to feel less bored.
feel sick. C Your body needs a lot of rest in order
D to heal.
Tests cannot tell whether you have a
cold or the flu. D Rest is not important when you are
feeling well.
WEEK 9
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Stop the Invaders.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
When was the last time you were sick? What was it like? Write about what happened
and what you did to feel better.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 10
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Vanessa usually got to class before the bell sounded, but today she was running late and
barely made it. She and her friends had been talking about a rumor they had heard, and
1. Y N
she hadn’t paid attention to the time. A few people had seen a new girl walking around, and
everyone wondered whose class she would be in. A lot of stories about the new student
had been passed around already, so Vanessa was curious about her. Just then, Mr. Sharpe
came into the classroom followed by a girl Vanessa had never seen before. This must be 2. Y N
the new student, and she was going to be in Vanessa’s class. “Okay, everyone,” Mr. Sharpe
announced, “I want you all to meet Niki. She’s just moved here, and moving isn’t easy, so
let’s all make her welcome.”
3. Y N
1. What is the setting of this text? 4. Which noun means the same
as rumor? 4. Y N
A the school library
B the cafeteria
A question
C a classroom
B gossip 5. Y N
D the gym
C interest
D friend
2. What kind of picture might help a ___ / 5

reader understand this text? 5. Which means that someone may not
be on time? Total
A a picture of a new student
B a picture of a test
A curious
C a picture of a baseball game

B running late
D a picture of a teacher
C passed around
D paid attention
3. What does the word barely tell

readers about Vanessa?
A She was not feeling well.

B She was very curious.
C She had a lot of time.
D She was almost late.

WEEK 10
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Niki was a new student in Vanessa’s class. She had only been there for a few days, but
rumors about her were already spreading around. Some of Vanessa’s friends said that Niki
1. Y N
was really rich and she was a stuck-up snob. Other people spread the rumor that Niki got
good grades but only because she cheated on all of her tests. Vanessa heard other stories,
too, and she didn’t know which ones to believe. She didn’t know what to say to Niki, either.
2. Y N Niki never talked very much unless the teacher called on her. Vanessa had tried to talk to
her a few times. But every time she did, Niki ended the conversation as soon as possible.
Vanessa didn’t want to be rude or mean, but if Niki didn’t want to talk to her, maybe she was
a snob just as Vanessa had heard she was.
3. Y N
1. Why does Vanessa think that Niki 4. What kind of sentence is: Niki was a
4. Y N might be a snob? new student in Vanessa’s class.
A Niki doesn’t talk very much. A compound

5. Y N B Niki tells her she is a snob. B simple
C Vanessa’s teacher tells her Niki is C complex
a snob. D interrogatory
D Vanessa’s mother tells her Niki is
___ / 5 a snob.
5. What are the phrases really rich and
Total stuck-up snob examples of?
2. Which title best describes this text’s
main idea? A similes
A Making a Friend
B metaphors
B The First Day of School

C personification
C Rumor Has It
D alliteration
D Starting Over
3. Which has the same meaning as the

word mean in the last sentence?
A unkind
B cheap
C average
D friendly

WEEK 10
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Vanessa had tried to talk to Niki, the new student, but Niki never said much. Vanessa
was beginning to think that Niki was a snob—that’s what the rumor was about her, anyway.
Well, if Niki wanted to be a snob, that was just fine with Vanessa. So for several days,
1. Y N
Vanessa didn’t speak to Niki at all. Then one day, Vanessa noticed that Niki had forgotten
her notebook in class. Vanessa decided to try one last time to talk to Niki. Holding the
notebook, she followed Niki out of the classroom.
2. Y N
When she caught up with Niki, she said, “Here, I think you forgot this.”
Niki thanked her and abruptly turned away. Then, she suddenly turned back, smiled, and
3. Y N
said, “Thanks for being nice to me.”
Vanessa couldn’t believe Niki had actually spoken to her. Maybe she wasn’t such a snob.
4. Y N
1. What is the turning point in the 3. What does the word abruptly tell
text’s plot? readers about Niki’s action? 5. Y N
A Vanessa hears a new rumor A She moves loudly.

about Niki. B She moves slowly.
B Niki smiles and talks to Vanessa. C She moves quickly. ___ / 5
C Vanessa’s mother asks her to be D She moves happily.
nice to Niki. Total
D Niki is nice to one of
Vanessa’s friends. 4. Which word from the text is
an adverb?
2. How is the main event of this text— A spoken

Vanessa is trying to get to know
Niki—described to readers?
B snob
C suddenly
A through the actions of the characters
D said
B only through dialogue
C with foreshadowing
D with a picture for actually?
A never
B possibly
C really
D quietly
WEEK 10
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Don’t Believe the Rumors

Vanessa and Niki had just begun a friendship. Niki was new at school, and Vanessa had
thought she was a snob. That was mostly because Niki barely said anything, and besides,
that was the rumor about her. But then, Niki had forgotten her notebook in the classroom by
accident, and Vanessa had returned it to her. Then the two girls started to talk, and they got to
know each other. Now Vanessa knew that Niki wasn’t a snob, but she still didn’t understand why
Niki wouldn’t talk to anyone.
One day, Niki explained herself. “I

don’t really know anyone here except
you, and I’m kind of shy. I know
everybody thinks I’m a snob, but I’m not.
I just don’t know what to say to people.”
Vanessa understood that, and it

made her feel guilty for thinking Niki was
a snob. She shouldn’t have believed the
rumors about Niki.
Vanessa had an idea for helping

Niki. “If my other friends get to know
you,” she told Niki, “they’ll like you, too,
just like I do. So why don’t you sit with
my friends and me at lunch tomorrow?
Then everybody will see what you’re
like.” Niki was very doubtful, but she
was tired of everyone thinking she was
a snob. So she reluctantly agreed to
have lunch with Vanessa and her friends.
The next day, Vanessa and Niki waited in the cafeteria for Vanessa’s other friends. Niki was
nervous, but Vanessa said, “Don’t worry. Just be yourself. You’ll be fine.” Finally, everyone
else arrived.
One of Vanessa’s friends took one look at Niki and asked, “Why are you sitting with the snob,
Vanessa? Come on and eat with us.” Niki’s eyes filled with tears.
Vanessa took a breath and then said, “I’m sitting with Niki because she’s my friend and she’s
nice. How about finding out for yourself instead of believing every rumor you hear?” For a
moment, everyone stared at each other. Then, very slowly, the other girls sat down at the table.
At first, nobody said much, but soon, they started talking. By the time lunch was over, Niki
realized that Vanessa was right—all she had to do was be herself. And all everyone else needed
to do was stop believing rumors.

WEEK 10
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Don’t Believe the Rumors” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Whom is the conflict between? 5. Which statement reflects a purpose
for reading this text?
A Vanessa and her math teacher 1. Y N
B Vanessa and her mom

A I want to learn how to make friends.
C Vanessa and Niki

B I want to read about how some kids
checked out the truth behind rumors. 2. Y N
D Vanessa and her friends C I want to know how to spread rumors.
D I want to know about the family
2. Why doesn’t Niki say very much? backgrounds of the characters. 3. Y N
A She doesn’t speak the

same language. 6. Which conclusion makes the
most sense? 4. Y N
B She is a snob.
C She is shy and doesn’t know what A Vanessa has several friends.
to say. B Niki has more friends than 5. Y N
D She doesn’t like Vanessa. Vanessa does.
C Vanessa is not a good student.
3. What might happen the D Niki wants to be a swimmer. 6. Y N
following day?
A Vanessa will eat lunch alone. 7. What lesson does Vanessa learn?
7. Y N
B Vanessa will be very angry with Niki. A She learns that Niki is a snob.
C Niki will stop speaking to Vanessa. B She learns not to believe rumors.
D Niki will have lunch with Vanessa and C She learns that her other friends 8. Y N
her friends again.
are snobs.
D She learns not to sit with her friends
4. How do Vanessa’s friends likely feel at lunch.
when they first see that she is sitting
___ / 8
with Niki?
8. How does Vanessa feel about no Total
A excited longer believing the rumors?
B surprised A She feels angry.
C frightened B She feels guilty.
D joyful C She feels proud.
D She feels afraid.

WEEK 10
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Don’t Believe the Rumors.” Then, read the prompt and
SCORE
___ / 4
Have you ever heard rumors about people? What did you do? Write about what you
have done about a rumor or how you would handle gossip.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 11
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Companies want to sell products or services that people will buy. But in order to do
that, they need to understand their market—the people who will buy from them. So, many
1. Y N
companies use market research to find out about their customers. For example, imagine
a company is planning to make a new kind of video game. The company wants to make a
game people want. So the company decides to find out the mean, or average, age of
video-game players. To do that, the company finds out the ages of a group of players. Then, 2. Y N
the company adds up all of the ages and divides that total by the number of players. That is
the mean age. Then, the company can interview people in that age group and find out what
they want in a game.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which word below is both a noun
4. Y N
and a verb?
A video games
B how companies make their products
A people
C how companies find out about

B products 5. Y N
their customers C decides

D adding D group
___ / 5
2. Which chapter title reflects the 5. What is a tool for finding out
Total
main idea? about customers?
A Going to the Market A a video game

B Means and Averages B market research
C Market Research C a company
D A Mean Age D totaling
3. Which word is a synonym for mean?
A division
B group
C total
D average

WEEK 11
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Imagine a company has decided to make a new kind of video game. The company knows
1. Y N that if the game costs too much, people will not buy it. If the game does not cost enough,
the company will not earn much money. So the company wants to find out how much money
people are willing to spend on video games. The company knows that a few people will
spend a lot of money on video games and a few people will only spend a little. The company
2. Y N wants to sell its game to the most people. So the company wants to find out how much most
people are willing to spend on video games. To do that, the company uses the median price
that people will pay. To find the median, the company lists all of the prices people will pay,
from lowest to highest price. The number in the middle of that list is the median price.
3. Y N
4. Y N
1. What is the first step in finding a 3. What does the root medi– in
median price? median mean?
A Look for the price in the middle. A middle

5. Y N B List all of the prices from lowest B price
to highest. C company
C Put a price on a video game. D money
D Add up the prices.
___ / 5
Total 4. Which prefix could be added to make
2. What kind of text feature would help an antonym of willing?
explain this information?
A bi–
A a graph of the most popular B un–
video games
B a photograph of a television
C epi–
C a chart showing the range of prices

D sub–
for a game
D a picture of a video game 5. Which word means find out?
A report
B earn
C learn
D ask

WEEK 11
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Imagine that a video game company makes several different games. The company wants
to make a lot of copies of the most popular games. That way, there will be enough copies
of those games for everyone who wants one. The company doesn’t want to make a lot of 1. Y N
copies of games that are not popular. If it does, there will be a lot of unsold copies of those
games. The company won’t earn money that way. So the company finds out how many
copies it sells of each game. It makes a list of games and the number of copies sold. The
2. Y N
game that appears the most often on that list is the mode—it is the most frequently bought
game. The company will make more copies of that game than it will make of other games
since it will probably sell more of that game.
3. Y N
1. Why does a company want to 3. In any group of numbers, what is

make a lot of copies of popular the mode? 4. Y N
video games?
A the smallest number
A so there will be enough copies for B the largest number
everyone who wants one 5. Y N
B so those games will not be popular

C the number that appears most often
C so there will only be a few copies of

D always the middle number
those games
___ / 5
D so the company will make 4. Which part of speech is the
new games word frequently? Total
A verb
2. According to this text, what does the
B noun
mode explain?
C adverb
A which games companies make
D adjective
B which item appears the least often on
a list
C how much a video game costs 5. Which word is a synonym
for enough?
D which item appears the most often on
a list A never
B some
C sufficient
D sparse

WEEK 11
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Game On
Imagine that BestGames wants to make a new video game called Dragon Days. BestGames
wants to make a game that people want to buy, so the company will do some market
research. One thing that BestGames wants to know is the mean age of video-game buyers.
So BestGames finds out the ages of a group of video-game buyers. Then, it adds up those
ages and divides that total by the number of buyers. Here is what BestGames learns about
video-game buyers:
Video-Game Buyers
Total video-game buyers 100
Sum of buyers’ ages 2,200
Mean age of video-game buyers 22
BestGames also wants to know how much people will pay for Dragon Days. So BestGames
asks a number of people how much they will pay for a game. BestGames wants to know how
much most people will pay, so it will list all of the prices people are willing to pay, from lowest
to highest. The number in the middle is the median. That number will give BestGames a good
idea of what most people will pay. Here is what BestGames learns about the median price
people will pay:
Prices Video-Game Buyers Will Pay

Lowest price $1.00
Highest price $75.00
Median price $25.00
Once the game is in stores, BestGames needs to monitor its sales. So each month, the
company lists the game that sells the most copies. The game that is on that list most often is
the mode. That is the most popular game. If Dragon Days is the mode, BestGames will make
a lot of copies of that game. That is because it will probably sell most of them. Here is what
BestGames learns about its sales.
Most Popular Games

Month Highest Sales
January New World
February Dragon Days
March Dragon Days
April Dragon Days
May Your City
June Your City

WEEK 11
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Game On” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is the average age of 5. Which was the least popular game
video-game buyers? between January and June?
1. Y N
A 22 A New World
B 100 B Dragon Days
C 2,200 C Your City 2. Y N
D 12 D BestGames
3. Y N
2. Based on the text, what can you 6. What would BestGames likely do if
tell about the definition of the Your City became the mode?
word mean?
A stop making video games 4. Y N
A not nice B make a lot of copies of Dragon Days
B have good intentions C stop selling it
C intend to do something D make more copies of it
5. Y N
D average
7. Who might be most interested in this 6. Y N

3. Which game will BestGames likely type of data?
make the most copies of for sale?
A a journalist who works for a
A Your City video-game magazine 7. Y N
B Dragon Days B a kindergarten math teacher

C New World C a supermarket owner
8. Y N
D April D a movie theater worker
4. What would BestGames do if the 8. What does this text tell you about
mean age of game buyers were 8? market research?
___ / 8
A find out the mean age of game sellers A It is only helpful to video-game Total
companies.
B not make any more games
B It is mostly about making guesses.
C make more games for adults
C Companies rely on it to make
D make more games for kids many decisions.
D Most businesses do not think it is
very important.

WEEK 11
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Game On.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
How do you find the mean of a set of numbers? How do you find the median of a set of
numbers? Explain how to find the mean and the median of a set of numbers.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 12
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Josh got tired of losing his things, especially important things like money. He admitted
that it was mostly his own fault. He didn’t keep his room very organized and he didn’t clean
it often. Whenever he lost something, his mom or dad offered to help him look for it, but 1. Y N
Josh didn’t want them going through his things. One day, he lost a game that belonged to
his friend Ian, and although he looked for a long time, he couldn’t find it. That was when
he knew he needed to do something about his room. That night at dinner, he asked his
2. Y N
parents, “Can I have some crates or boxes or something for my stuff? I don’t want to keep
losing everything.” His mom and dad thought that would be a very good idea for Josh’s
room, so they agreed to take him shopping.
3. Y N
1. Who is the main character? 4. Which is the meaning of the noun

stuff in this text? 4. Y N
A Ian
B Ian’s mom
A things
C Josh
B fill 5. Y N
D Ian’s dad
C eat too much
D push
2. What is Josh’s problem?

___ / 5
5. What does the phrase tired of mean?
A His room is too large. Total
B He keeps losing things.
A annoyed with
C He is angry with his parents.

B sleepy
D He is angry with his friend Ian.

C excited about
D new to

of admitted?
A sang
B confessed
C realized
D denied

WEEK 12
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Josh and his parents went to the home-supply store to get some things to help him
organize his room. Josh had a bad habit of losing things, and he was tired of it. He wanted
1. Y N some way to keep track of everything, and he didn’t want to ask for help every time he
lost something. When they got to the store, Josh’s dad asked him what kinds of things
he wanted. At first, Josh wasn’t sure—he had never made an effort to organize his things
before. But soon, he chose a storage cart with four drawers in it and a storage bin that fit
2. Y N under his bed. Josh’s mom suggested a laundry hamper so Josh would have a separate
place for his dirty clothes. Josh had the feeling it wasn’t going to be easy to organize his
things, but now he had the tools he needed to do it.
3. Y N
1. Why do Josh and his parents go to 4. Which verb means to keep track of?
the home-supply store?
4. Y N A clean
A Josh needs to buy a new bed. B lose
B Josh’s parents need to buy some C monitor
5. Y N sheets and towels.
C Josh wants a way to keep track of
D throw
his things.
D His parents want to see what the 5. What does the phrase make an
___ / 5 store is like. effort mean?
Total A talk
2. How are events ordered in this text?
B shop
A in order of importance C clean
B in the order they occur D try
C in alphabetical order
D in numerical order
3. Which word is a synonym for lose?
A mistake
B discover
C misplace
D discuss

WEEK 12
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Josh knew that he would have a lot of work to do. His parents had just gotten him some
new storage bins and a laundry hamper so he could organize his room. But his room was
1. Y N
such a mess that he didn’t quite know where to begin. The easiest thing to do was separate
clothes from everything else. So the first thing Josh did was to toss all of his dirty clothes
into his new laundry hamper. Once that was done, he looked around to see what else he
could separate from everything. There were a lot of movies and video games lying around, 2. Y N
so Josh gathered them all up and put them into one of his storage bins. Then, he picked up
books and papers and put them into another storage bin. It wasn’t long before everything
was put away.
3. Y N
1. What is the setting of this text? 4. Which is the root word in lying?
4. Y N
A the home-supply store A lie
B school B lay
C the living room C loaf 5. Y N
D Josh’s room D light
2. Why is Josh’s first action to put his 5. What does the phrase know where ___ / 5
dirty clothes in the hamper? to begin mean?
Total
A Josh doesn’t have any clean clothes. A get ready to go
B His mom tells Josh to start B begin at the starting line
with clothes. C how to get started
C It is easiest to separate clothes from D start walking
everything else.
D Josh puts all of his clothes away.
3. What does the word gotten mean in

this text?
A taken
B bought
C talked about
D washed

WEEK 12
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Josh Comes Clean

Josh was tired of always losing things, so his parents bought him storage bins and other
things to organize his room. Now he was finding it easier than ever to keep track of his
belongings. He even found some overdue library books and returned them. He found a game
that belonged to his friend Ian, too, and gave it back. Josh noticed how much time he saved
just by using storage bins and a laundry hamper. He was beginning to understand now why his
parents always nagged him about cleaning his room.
One day, Josh decided to get his skateboard out of the garage and ride it for a while.
When he got to the garage, though, he couldn’t find his skateboard. The garage was just as
disorganized as his room had been. Josh thought about it for a while and then decided he might
as well clean the garage. At least that way he would be able to find his skateboard, bike, and
helmet. He asked his parents if they could get more storage bins, and they were happy to agree
to that! His dad even said there were some bins in the basement, and that Josh could use them.
So one Saturday morning, his mom moved the car out of the garage, and Josh got to work.
First, he made separate piles for everything. There was a pile for gardening supplies, a pile
for tools, and a pile for bike and skateboard equipment. There was also a pile for painting and
cleaning supplies. By the time Josh was done, there were seven different piles of things. After
everything was sorted out, Josh started putting everything into different bins. It took a long time
because the garage was a big mess. But when Josh was finished, it looked a lot neater. When
everything was stored, Josh swept the garage. His family said the garage looked great, and
Josh knew that the next time he wanted his skateboard, he would be able to find it.

WEEK 12
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Josh Comes Clean” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is the last thing that 5. From which point of view is this
Josh does? text told?
1. Y N
A He sweeps the garage. A third person
B He makes separate piles for B first person
everything. C 2. Y N
second person
C He puts things into different bins. D There is no point of view.
D He looks for his skateboard.
3. Y N
6. Why might Josh wait until the very
2. What does it mean that Josh was end to sweep the garage?
tired of something?
A There is no room for him to sweep 4. Y N
A He needed sleep. until he stores everything.
B He was ready for a change. B His parents tell him that it’s not safe
C to sweep. 5. Y N
He needed to change a tire.
D He had too much energy.
C The broom is broken and Josh has to
get a new one.
D Josh is too tired to sweep at first. 6. Y N
3. What will likely happen the next time
Josh wants his skateboard?
7. How do Josh’s parents likely feel
A He will lose it. about the way the garage looks at 7. Y N
the end of the text?
B He will find it quickly.
C He will not ride it. A angry
8. Y N
D His dad will take it. B confused
C afraid
4. Which purpose for reading is most D happy
appropriate for this text?
___ / 8
A to know how someone stays 8. Which of these sayings is a good Total
organized summary of the theme of this text?
B to know how to keep my dog clean A Too many cooks spoil the broth.
C to read about a character who B The early bird catches the worm.
apologizes for a lie
D to read about how to better clean
C A place for everything, and
everything in its place.
my house
D Do unto others as you would have
them do unto you.
WEEK 12
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Josh Comes Clean.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
How organized are you? Write about how you keep track of your things.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 13
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Have you ever passed a construction site? Putting up a house or another building takes a
lot of time and knowledge. If the building isn’t constructed well, it could be very dangerous.
1. Y N
If a building is constructed on land that can’t support a building, that could be dangerous,
too. So the people who design and make buildings have to be good at their jobs. There are
several steps to designing and constructing buildings. First, an architect (AHRK-i-tekt) draws
up the plans for the building. The architect makes a small model of the building so everyone 2. Y N
will know what the building will look like. Then, a construction company uses those plans to
make the house, store, or other building. When the building is finished, a building inspector
goes through it to make sure that everything is safe. Finally, the building is ready for people
to use it. 3. Y N
1. What does a building inspector do? 3. Which word is a synonym 4. Y N

for construct?
A A building inspector draws up plans
for a building. A build
5. Y N
B A building inspector makes buildings. B destruct
C A building inspector goes through a C pour
building to be sure it is safe. D model
D A building inspector makes a model ___ / 5
of a building.
4. Which word from the text can be both Total
a noun and a verb?
2. What is the first step in constructing
a building? A architect
A A building inspector goes through

B plan
the building. C safe
B An architect draws up the plans. D several
C A construction company makes
the building.
5. Which of these is not a word that
D People can use the building. tells you the order of things?
A then
B finally
C first
D have

WEEK 13
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
In most cities, people cannot put up buildings wherever they want because different kinds
of buildings are used for different things. For example, factories are used to make things.
1. Y N
Sometimes, the people who work there use dangerous equipment. Factories can also
be extremely loud. So it wouldn’t be wise to have a factory next to a school. But factories
can be near each other. And schools and houses can be near each other—in fact, a lot
2. Y N of schools and houses are very near each other. So how do people know what kinds of
buildings they can put up in an area? Most cities and towns have laws called zoning laws.
Those laws tell which parts, or zones, of a city are for houses and schools, for factories, and
for stores and other businesses.
3. Y N
1. Which title best describes what this 4. Which noun describes rules for the
4. Y N text is about? parts of a city that are for different
kinds of buildings?
A An Architect’s Dream
B Building Up
A area laws
5. Y N
C City Zones
B business laws
D Living Together
C factory laws
D zoning laws
___ / 5
2. Which type of book would likely
Total include this information in a chapter? 5. What does the phrase put up mean
in this text?
A a book of maps
B a book about city government
A tolerate
C a history book about a small town

B pay for
D a newspaper article about homes

C build
for sale D crash
3. What is another term for an area of a

city or town?
A zone
B building
C factory
D law

WEEK 13
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
It is important that buildings are safe for people. So most cities and states have laws that
tell how buildings must be constructed. Those laws are called building codes. For example,
1. Y N
codes tell how floors and walls must be made. They also tell what materials can be used
for basements, attics, and roofs. There are other codes, too, that builders must follow when
they construct houses, factories, and other buildings. In fact, before a building can be used,
a building inspector goes through the building. The building inspector checks to make sure 2. Y N
that the building has been constructed properly. If the builders have followed the codes,
then walls and floors are sturdy and roofs are safe and strong. Electrical wiring has been
done properly. And stairs are wide enough and strong enough to be safe. Once the building
inspector is sure that the building follows the codes, then people can use the building. 3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. If a building is described using the 4. Y N

adjective sturdy, what does that
A what building codes are and what mean?
they do
A It is expensive.
5. Y N
B electrical wiring
C factories and houses
B It is tall.
D a day in the life of a building inspector

C It is strong.
D It is nearby. ___ / 5
2. Why do cities and states have Total

building codes? 5. Which word or phrase shows that
the author thinks building codes are
A All buildings must have stairs. important?
B Many buildings have basements A safe and strong
and attics.
C Buildings have walls and roofs.
B constructed properly
D It is important that buildings are safe

C sturdy
for people to use. D all of the above
3. Which prefix could be added to make

an antonym of properly?
A hyper–
B sub–
C per–
D im–

WEEK 13
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Civil Engineers
How are houses, stores, and other buildings designed? What about roads, bridges, and
tunnels? Many of these are designed by civil engineers. They manage all kinds of construction
projects. They design tunnels, bridges, and office buildings. They design houses and apartment
buildings, too. Some work for cities and states. Others work for construction companies. One
of their jobs is to see that construction projects are safe. Another is to be sure that they do not
harm the environment. They also must be sure their projects are completed on time.
Sometimes, civil engineers are hired by towns or cities. For example, if a city is planning to
build a new mall or office building, it will need civil engineers. If a company wants to build a new
apartment complex, it may hire a civil engineer. If a state wants to build a new system of roads
or improve the roads it has, it will hire civil engineers.
How do civil engineers learn their jobs? Most people who want to be civil engineers go to
college. They study math, physics, and other kinds of science. After college, they often work
with an experienced engineer. They do their job for four years, and then they take a special
exam. If they pass that exam, they get a license. With that license, they can work directly with
people or they can be hired by companies.
Civil engineers often work near construction sites. Many work near larger towns and cities
where buildings are being planned. Civil engineers are responsible for a lot of things. They
must be sure that their projects follow building codes and are completed by the deadline. They
also have to be sure that their projects do not harm the environment or cost more than the
budget allows.

WEEK 13
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Civil Engineers” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which question is not answered in 5. Which of these projects would a civil
the text? engineer manage?
1. Y N
A What do civil engineers do? A building a new kind of computer
B How much money do civil B designing a new style of jeans
engineers earn? C 2. Y N
designing a new kind of car
C How do civil engineers learn D building a new shopping center
their jobs?
D Who hires civil engineers? 3. Y N
6. Which is likely the author’s opinion
about civil engineers?
2. Which words in the text help the
reader understand the meaning of A They do not work hard. 4. Y N
the word engineer?
B They are professional athletes.
A building and designed C They are not interesting.
5. Y N
B civil and responsible D They do important work.
C towns and cities
D budget and cost 7. Who would most likely work with a 6. Y N
civil engineer?
3. What might be a purpose for reading A a company that wants to make a

this text? new snack 7. Y N
A to learn what civil engineers do

B a person who wants to buy a car
B to learn how to build a house

C a city that wants to build a mall
8. Y N
C to find the nearest big city
D a teacher who wants new supplies
D to learn to take care of

the environment 8. Why are civil engineers important?
___ / 8
A They know all about bridges
4. What does a civil engineer have and tunnels. Total
to know?
B They work near construction sites.
A the best commuting routes C There are not many places for civil
B engineers to work.
a city’s building codes
C how to operate a train
D They ensure that construction
projects are safe and do not harm the
D how to mix paints environment.

WEEK 13
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Civil Engineers.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
What do you think it might be like to be a civil engineer? Write about what would be
the best and the hardest parts of the job.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 14
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
This morning, the weather was cloudy and the forecast was for very rainy weather,
so Melanie wore a hooded jacket to school. At school, Mrs. Jackson explained that a
1. Y N
low-pressure weather system was going to pass through the area. That meant that the
air would be warmer, so it would rise, and that would bring wind, clouds, and a lot of rain.
Mrs. Jackson told the class that low-pressure systems sometimes lead to major storms,
such as hurricanes. When she heard that, Melanie wondered if this particular low-pressure 2. Y N
system would bring a hurricane. Mrs. Jackson said, “Well, there is a hurricane forming out
over the ocean, but we don’t know if it will hit land yet. And fortunately, we’re not very near
the ocean, so it probably won’t be a serious storm here.”
3. Y N
1. What is Melanie worried about in 4. Which verb has a similar meaning as

this text? the word forming? 4. Y N
A the weather A flying

B her grades B disappearing 5. Y N
C her family C developing
D one of her friends D swimming
___ / 5
2. What does the important vocabulary 5. What is the meaning of hit in
in this text teach readers? this text? Total
A how hurricanes are formed from A to bat

low-pressure weather systems B to score
B what to do if a hurricane hits C to win
C why Mrs. Jackson was a nice teacher D to strike
D where Melanie lived
3. What is a hurricane?
A a kind of jacket
B a kind of storm
C a kind of ocean
D a kind of cloud

WEEK 14
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Melanie had heard in class and in weather reports that there was going to be a major
storm. A hurricane was forming over the ocean, and it was possible that it might hit land.
1. Y N
One morning, the weather report mentioned that the barometric pressure was starting to
fall. That meant that a low-pressure system was starting to move through the area. Melanie
asked her parents what they would do if a hurricane did strike land. They told Melanie
that they lived inland—not very near the ocean. So the storm probably wouldn’t be severe.
2. Y N
“Besides,” her mom told Melanie, “even if it is a serious storm, we’re ready. We’ve got
flashlights and lanterns in case we lose power. And there’s plenty of food and bottled water.”
3. Y N
1. What does Melanie’s mom say about 4. Which verb has a similar meaning to
the weather? the word mentioned?
4. Y N
A She doesn’t know about the weather. A shouted
B There will probably not be any rain. B asked
5. Y N
C The family is ready in case there is C stated
a storm. D surveyed
D The weather is sunny and warm.
___ / 5 5. Which word or phrase means the
Total
2. What makes Melanie think there pressure of a mass of air?
might be a storm?
A ocean pressure
A Melanie’s friends have told her there B land
will be a storm.
B A hurricane is forming over
C hurricane
the ocean. D barometric pressure
C Her mom and dad are very worried
about the weather.
D Melanie is afraid of hurricanes.
3. Which word is a synonym for severe?
A serious
B cloudy
C distant
D brilliant

WEEK 14
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
A major storm was predicted to strike within the next few days. Melanie and her parents
weren’t worried about it because they had the supplies they would need. But they still
wanted to be sure that they were prepared. So they checked to make sure that everything 1. Y N
was ready in case the storm was severe. Melanie checked each flashlight and lantern to
be sure that all of them were working. Her dad checked that the windows and doors were
sealed properly. Her mom checked to be sure that the basement was sealed off so water
wouldn’t leak in. The family also went over their emergency plan. Then they made sure they 2. Y N
had plenty of canned food and water. When they were done, they knew that they were ready
if bad weather came.
3. Y N
1. Which action is not part of this 3. Which two words are synonyms?
text’s plot?
4. Y N
A canned and food
A The family checks that the basement B sealed and properly
is sealed.
B The family checks that the smoke
C storm and strike 5. Y N
alarms are working. D ready and prepared

C The family checks that the flashlights
are all working.
4. What does the adjective plenty tell
D The family checks that the doors and the reader about the family’s supply ___ / 5
windows are sealed. of canned food and water?
Total
A They have more than enough.
2. How do the characters feel about
B They have no supplies.
the storm?
C They have only a little.
A They are not worried.
D The supplies are spoiled.
B They are happy.
C They are excited.
5. What does the phrase went
D They have no feelings. over mean in this text?
A telephoned
B traveled
C reviewed
D wrote

WEEK 14
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Storm Front
A major storm had been predicted for a few days. Finally one afternoon, it struck. Melanie
had just gotten home from school when the sky began to get unusually dark and the wind began
to blow harder. She hurried around the house shutting the windows so that rain wouldn’t pour
in. For a while, not much happened, although it did start to sprinkle. Fortunately, Melanie’s mom
and dad got home from work before the weather got terribly bad.
Then, all of a sudden, the skies opened up. The rain poured down as though someone had
overturned a bucket of water. It lashed against the roofs and churned down the streets. It beat a
loud drumbeat on the windowpanes and ran like a river down driveways. It was raining so hard
that Melanie could barely see through the windows, but she could certainly hear the wind. It
whipped the tree limbs around and rattled against the windows and doors.
Before long, the wind had raised its voice from a moan to a loud scream as the storm blew
through. Then, everything went dark. For a moment, everybody sat silently, but then Melanie
felt her way to the kitchen for some flashlights. Melanie’s dad went to get lanterns and her mom
pulled some blankets out of the closet. Everyone got comfortable in the living room as they
waited for the storm to pass.
After a while, Melanie got hungry. Her

mom and dad said they were ready to eat,
too. So they took flashlights back to the
kitchen and found the peanut butter, the jelly,
and some bread. Melanie’s dad grabbed
a bag of potato chips, and Melanie found
some cookies. It wasn’t a normal kind of
dinner, but then, this wasn’t a normal kind of
evening. They ate their sandwiches in the
living room and told ghost stories. Finally,
everyone drifted off to sleep.
By the next morning, the storm had blown

away. There were tree limbs on the ground,
and everything was soaked from the heavy
rain. But everyone was safe, and there had
been no real damage. Melanie and her
family felt lucky about that. It had actually
been kind of fun—it certainly had been
an adventure!

WEEK 14
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Storm Front” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What do the title and picture tell 5. From which point of view is this
readers about the topic of the text? text told?
1. Y N
A It is about a swimming pool party. A third person
B It is about moving to a new town. B first person
C It is about buying a new house. C second person 2. Y N
D It is about a major storm. D There is no point of view.
3. Y N
2. Why does everything go dark? 6. Which inference makes the most
sense, based on the text?
A The lightbulb burns out.
B The storm makes the house
A The wind blew the tree limbs down. 4. Y N
lose power. B Melanie is very, very afraid of storms.

C Melanie cannot remember anything. C The family has no flashlights.
5. Y N
D The family falls asleep. D The storm will go on for many days.
3. Why might the author use words 7. What can a reader learn from 6. Y N
such as churned and lashed? this text?
A to get readers to use candles A Family is important.

and flashlights 7. Y N
B Eating sandwiches for dinner is fun.
B to get readers to go out in the rain C Preparation is critical for getting
C to show how afraid Melanie is through a disaster.
8. Y N
D to show how powerful the storm is D Storms are scary.
4. How do Melanie and her parents 8. Why is the family able to get through
solve the problem of getting food the storm so easily?
___ / 8
without electricity?
A They are very well prepared, with Total
A They decide not to eat dinner. food and extra sources of light.
B They make peanut butter and jelly B Peanut butter and jelly is their
sandwiches. favorite meal.
C They go out to a restaurant.

C The power is out and they cannot
use any electricity.
D They go to a neighbor’s house. D They enjoy listening to the wind
and rain.

WEEK 14
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Storm Front.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Tell about the worst storm you can remember. What was it like? Write about the storm.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 15
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
How do you learn about what’s going on in the world? Many people get their news by
reading a daily newspaper. Newspapers generally have several sections. Each section
1. Y N
focuses on one kind of story. The front section is for major national stories. World news is
in the front section, too. There is often another section that gives local and regional news.
Many newspapers have a section for sports news, too. Some have a section for business
news. Newspapers also often have a section that lists movies and TV shows. Opinions are 2. Y N
often given in a newspaper’s editorial section. That’s where the newspaper prints letters to
the editor. And finally, newspapers usually have a classified section. That section lists ads
for jobs, personal ads, and items to be bought or sold.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which section of a newspaper lists

4. Y N
ads for jobs?
A what is in newspapers
B how to write a news story
A front
C where to buy a newspaper

B editorial 5. Y N
D the history of newspapers

C sports
D classified
2. Which will you probably not find in ___ / 5

a newspaper? 5. What is the tone of the text?
Total
A major national stories A informative
B letters to the editor B silly
C directions to the nearest park C persuasive
D sports and business news D serious
3. Which word is a synonym for region?
A major
B city
C area
D newspaper

WEEK 15
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Many people get their news by listening to the radio. There are some advantages to
1. Y N listening to the radio to get news. For one thing, news can be reported on the radio as it
is happening. People don’t have to wait until the newspaper is delivered to find out what is
going on. For another, radio news is convenient. People can find out the news while they
are commuting, or traveling to work. In fact, radio news is so popular that there are many
2. Y N all-news radio stations. Radio stations often report the news every hour. Some report it
every half-hour. At rush hour, they also have traffic reports. Radio news stories often do not
have a lot of detail. That is because radio stations tend to have short news breaks.
3. Y N
1. Which statement is not true about 3. Which prefix could be added to

radio news? advantages to make its antonym?
4. Y N
A Radio news stories often do not have A acro–
a lot of detail. B multi–
5. Y N B Radio news is reported only in C bi–
the morning.
C At rush hour, many radio stations
D dis–
have traffic reports.
___ / 5 D Many radio stations report news 4. What part of speech is the word
every hour or half-hour. news in the first sentence?
Total
A noun
2. Which of these is not an advantage
B verb
of getting news on the radio?
C adjective
A News can be reported as it
D
is happening. conjunction
B Radio news is convenient.

C People can find out the news while 5. What does the phrase traveling to
work also mean?
they are commuting.
D Radio news stories are long A commuting
and detailed.
B reporting
C traveling
D rush hour

WEEK 15
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Since 1926, news has been reported on television. Until the late 1940s, though, most
people did not have TVs, so most people listened to the radio for their news. As more
1. Y N
people have gotten TVs, television news has become more and more important. Today,
most people have TVs, and most TV stations have news programs. There are a few kinds
of news programs. One of them is local news. Local news focuses on stories from the area
served by the TV station. Reporters go to places where news is happening and report their 2. Y N
stories. Local news programs have three sections: news, sports, and weather. Other kinds
of news programs report world and national news. Those programs do not usually have
sports and weather sections. Some news programs are called news magazines. Those
programs report stories in greater depth. There are a few news-only stations that have both 3. Y N
shorter news programs and news magazines.
4. Y N
1. How does the text compare local TV 3. Which word is a synonym
news and national TV news? for sections?
A National TV news is not on TV. A parts 5. Y N
B National TV news does not usually B days

have sports and weather. C pictures
C National TV news always covers D stories
stories in great depth. ___ / 5
D National TV news focuses on Total
stories from the area served by the 4. Which part of speech is the
TV station. word news in the phrase
news magazines?
2. Which vocabulary word is essential A an adjective

to the text and could be shown
in boldface?
B a verb
C a pronoun
A sections
D a conjunction
B stations
C important
5. Which phrase has the same meaning
D news as happening?
A taking place
B reporting on
C listening to
D taking a break

WEEK 15
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Extra! Extra!
Today there are many ways in which people can follow news stories. Many people listen to
the news on the radio while they are going to and from work. Other people read the newspaper
to get their news. But more than ever before, people get their news from the Internet. In a
survey of 2,259 adults, 61 percent said they get their news from the Internet.
There are a lot of different ways to get news on the Internet. Some people go to news
websites where they read articles about different news events. Other people go to blogs and
other websites where people write about news events and discuss them. Some people go to
video websites where they watch videos of news stories. All of those ways can help you learn
about what is happening in the news, but there are important things to keep in mind. First, it is
important to be sure you are going to safe sites. Second, it is important to remember that some
blogs and social media sites give their own points of view about events. Just because you read
a story on a blog or on a social site doesn’t mean the story is true. It’s a good idea to check any
story at a news site to be sure it is true. It’s also a good idea to check out some news sites so
you know what is happening.
Many, many people also get their news from TV. In fact, 78 percent of people in the survey
said they get their news from TV. Both TV news programs and TV news magazines can tell you
what is going on, too. Again, it’s a good idea to find out what different TV programs say about a
story so you know the whole story. You can even use the Internet and TV to follow a story. That
is what 92 percent of people in the survey said they do. Today more than ever, there are a lot of
ways to follow a news story.

WEEK 15
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Extra! Extra!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Why should readers check stories on 5. What is a fact about blogs and social
a news site? media sites?
1. Y N
A There are not many news sites. A They are not current.
B There are many news sites. B They give their own points of view.
C News sites have a lot of videos. C They only share lies. 2. Y N
D News sites help readers be sure a D They are hard to access.

story is true.
3. Y N
6. Which is likely to be true about
2. If a reader forgets how many people the author?
get their news from the Internet, what
could he or she do? A The author is bored by news. 4. Y N
A Look it up in a dictionary.
B The author reads news stories.
B Read the last sentence.

C The author does not enjoy
the Internet. 5. Y N
C Read the title. D The author does not enjoy
D Reread the first paragraph. watching TV.
6. Y N
3. What is the author’s purpose? 7. What does the text say about how to
follow the news?
A to instruct 7. Y N
B to persuade
A There are many ways to follow
the news.
C to inform B TV is the best way. 8. Y N
D to entertain C The Internet is not an effective way.
D Radio is outdated.
4. How do people who drive a
long distance to work likely get
___ / 8
their news? 8. Which summarizes how most people
get their news? Total
A only from the Internet
B on the radio while they are in
A from newspapers and TV
their cars B from the Internet and TV
C only from newspapers C from TV and the radio
D on billboards D from the radio and newspapers

WEEK 15
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Extra! Extra!” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
What kind of news stories do you think are interesting? Write about how and where
you get news.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 16
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Shawn had an uneasy feeling right from the beginning that this was going to be an
annoying day. For one thing, he almost missed the school bus and had to race to get to the
1. Y N
bus stop on time. Then, when Shawn arrived at school, things quickly went downhill. In
English class, Mr. Matthews announced that everyone would be writing persuasive essays.
Shawn hated writing any kind of essay—he could never figure out what to write, and he
always ended up waiting until the last minute. Mr. Matthews announced that the class would 2. Y N
have a week to do the assignment and that he would be available to answer questions
after school. Shawn decided he was going to have to do something—maybe talk to Mr.
Matthews—because he had no idea how to get started on his essay.
3. Y N
1. How does Shawn plan to solve 4. What does the adjective persuasive
4. Y N
his problem? tell a reader about an essay?
A He will ask Mr. Matthews for help. A The essay tells how to do something.
B He will not write the essay. B The essay tells a personal story. 5. Y N
C He will ask a friend for help. C The essay gets people to do

D something or believe something.
He will ask his parents for help.
D The essay gives a list of facts
as information. ___ / 5
2. How does Shawn feel about writing
Total
an essay?
5. What is the meaning of the phrase
A excited things went downhill?
B very unhappy A got a lot better
C curious B slid down a hill
D proud C got worse
D were easy to do
3. Which prefix would be added to
make an antonym of available?
A uni–
B sub–
C un–
D pre–

WEEK 16
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Mr. Matthews had assigned the class a persuasive essay, and Shawn had no idea
1. Y N how to begin. He really disliked writing essays, but he also didn’t want to do poorly on
the assignment. So one day, he remained after school to try to get some advice from
Mr. Matthews. When he had caught Mr. Matthews’s attention, Shawn explained his situation.
“I never know how to get started with essays,” he began. “I get nervous about it, so I just
2. Y N stare at the blank page until the assignment’s due, and then I scribble whatever comes to
my mind. I know that’s a terrible way to write, but I don’t know any other way.”
Mr. Matthews replied, “You’re not the only one in that situation, Shawn. Let me offer you a
3. Y N few pointers for getting started, and hopefully, they will help you organize your ideas.”
4. Y N
1. What is the setting of this text? 4. What does the verb scribble indicate
about Shawn?
A a classroom
5. Y N B a cafeteria
A He writes slowly and carefully.
C a gymnasium
B He takes a lot of time to write.
D a principal’s office
C He plans his work weeks in advance.
D He writes quickly and without a plan.
___ / 5
Total
2. How does the author share a
solution to Shawn’s problem? 5. What does the phrase a few
pointers mean?
A Shawn realizes his own solutions in
a dream. A advice or tips
B Mr. Matthews suggests solutions. B arrows
C The author describes the solution for C papers
the reader. D words
D The author does not include
a solution.

of remain?
A stay
B leave
C study
D explain

WEEK 16
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Mr. Matthews was helping Shawn plan a persuasive essay he was assigned to write. “The
first step,” Mr. Matthews explained, “is to develop an opinion on something that’s important
to you.” Shawn wanted very much to be on the school’s football team. He had tried out for 1. Y N
the team, but he hadn’t been selected, so he decided to write a persuasive essay explaining
why he should be allowed to be a part of the team even if he didn’t play in every game.
Mr. Matthews agreed that Shawn had a workable idea for a persuasive essay, and he asked
2. Y N
Shawn to write it down. Then, Mr. Matthews asked Shawn to list all of the strongest reasons
he could think of—reasons that would convince someone that Shawn was right for the team.
When Shawn was finished, he had the ingredients for his essay.
3. Y N
1. What is Mr. Matthews helping Shawn 4. Which verb has the same meaning
to do? as allowed? 4. Y N
A study for a big test A called

B manage his time better B permitted 5. Y N
C write a persuasive essay C told
D practice baseball D forbidden
___ / 5
2. How does the author organize the 5. What is the tone of the text?
plot of this text? Total
A informative
A It is told in the order that Shawn B silly
should take to write his essay.
B It is told in the order of what
C mysterious
happened over a week. D encouraging
C It compares Shawn’s experience with
another student.
D It is told as a persuasive tale.

for persuade?
A explain
B agree
C essay
D convince

WEEK 16
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Shawn Does the Write Thing

Shawn and his class were working on a new assignment. They were writing persuasive
essays. When Shawn first learned about the assignment, he was unhappy. Shawn disliked
writing essays, and he wasn’t sure how to go about planning and writing a powerful essay that
would persuade someone to do something. So he asked Mr. Matthews for extra help planning
his essay.
Mr. Matthews suggested that Shawn begin by selecting a topic that was important to him.
Shawn wanted to be on the football team, so he decided to write a paper explaining why he
should be on the team. Next, Mr. Matthews suggested that Shawn list the strongest and best
reasons he could think of that would persuade people. When Shawn had listed his reasons, he
was ready to start writing.
First, Shawn wrote a draft of the paper. He began with his main point—that he should be
allowed to be on the football team. Then, he explained why he should be on the team, using the
reasons he had listed. Then, he wrote the conclusion—the end of the paper. After Shawn had
his draft finished, he was ready to revise what he had written.
Shawn read the paper aloud to himself and to his parents. His mom and dad suggested ways
that he could revise the paper to make it more convincing. Then, Shawn read the paper again.
This time, he thought of a few persuasive details himself. After the revisions were finished, it was
time to edit.
To edit his paper, Shawn

read it carefully to be certain
that he had spelled everything
the way it should be spelled.
He also checked his paper
for grammatical mistakes.
Mr. Matthews had explained
to the class that a paper is
more persuasive if it is written
carefully. By the time Shawn
was finished editing his paper, it
was written well enough that Mr.
Matthews gave him a very good
grade. The football coach read
Shawn’s paper, too, and was so
convinced by Shawn’s reasons
that he permitted Shawn to work
with the team!

WEEK 16
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Shawn Does the Write Thing” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is notable about the title? 5. From which point of view is this
text told?
A It indicates that the story is 1. Y N
about Shawn. A third person
B It uses a homophone to hint that the B first person
story is about writing. C second person 2. Y N
C It hints that the text is about D There is no point of view.
being right.
D The story teaches the difference 3. Y N
between right and wrong. 6. Which inference makes the
most sense?
2. Why does Shawn look for errors in A Mr. Matthews does not know who 4. Y N
his essay? Shawn is.
A Essays are more persuasive if they

B Shawn likes football.
are written well. C The football coach does not like 5. Y N
B Shawn is very good at spelling and Shawn’s essay.
never makes mistakes. D Shawn’s parents will not help him.
C Shawn’s mom and dad do not like 6. Y N
what Shawn has written.
D 7. What will likely happen the next time
Correct spelling and grammar are not Shawn has to write an essay?
important in essays.
A 7. Y N
He will not write another essay.
3. Shawn asked Mr. Matthews to

B It will be harder for him.
C It will be easier for him. 8.
A help him get on the football team.
D
Y N
He will not know what to do.
B persuade his parents to let him
play football.
C do the right thing. 8. What lesson does this text share
about writing essays? ___ / 8
D help him write a powerful essay.
A You must always ask for a Total
teacher’s help.
4. What is the first thing Mr. Matthews
B You should never have your parents
suggests that Shawn do?
write an essay for you.
A edit his essay C It is not rewarding.
B revise his essay D It is a process that takes planning
C choose a topic that he likes and hard work, but is also satisfying.
D read his essay aloud
WEEK 16
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Shawn Does the Write Thing.” Then, read the prompt and
SCORE
___ / 4
Do you think Shawn should be allowed to work with the football team even though he
was not chosen? Why? Explain your answer.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 17
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Do you live near a river? People have made their homes and built towns and cities near
rivers for thousands of years. A nearby river helps people in many ways. One way is that
rivers offer a steady supply of water. Water is essential for life. People have used river water 1. Y N
to cook, clean, drink, raise animals, and grow crops for a very long time. Another thing that
makes rivers very appealing is that they provide a good source of food. Fish and other water
animals have been a part of people’s diets for thousands of years. Finally, rivers provide
2. Y N
good transportation. They allow people to travel from one place to another, and they allow
goods to be moved easily from one place to another. No wonder so many of the first cities
were built near rivers.
3. Y N
1. Which statement is not a way that 4. In this text, the word drink is which
having a river nearby helps people? part of speech? 4. Y N
A It provides a steady supply of water. A a verb

B It provides a supply of food. B a noun 5. Y N
C It provides a means of transportation. C an adverb
D It provides a place for D an adjective
indoor activities.
___ / 5
5. Which prefix could be added to make
2. Which title reflects the main idea of an antonym of appealing? Total
this text?
A maxi–
A What Rivers Give Us B multi–
B The History of Cities C un–
C The Biggest Rivers in the World D sub–
D How to Sail on a River

for essential?
A large
B necessary
C attractive
D new

WEEK 17
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
What is the climate like where you live? Climate has a tremendous effect on the places
where people live and on the kinds of homes and lives they have. A climate that is too cold
1. Y N
makes it extremely hard to find and grow food. That means fewer people can live there, and
those people who do live there don’t get as much food. That’s why most of the first cities
weren’t built in very cold climates. A climate that is too hot and dry doesn’t allow people
to grow food easily, either. That’s one reason why the first cities weren’t built in very hot
2. Y N
climates. The first cities were built in places where the climate is warm and pleasant. That
way, people could grow crops and have pastures for their animals.
3. Y N
1. Which statement is true about very 4. Which word is an antonym of allow?

cold climates?
4. Y N A permit
A They do not have low temperatures. B notice
B They make a good place for a city. C prevent
5. Y N C They make it hard to find and D labor
grow food.
D They give people a place to
grow crops. 5. Which word or phrase has the same
meaning as the word pastures?
___ / 5
Total 2. Which vocabulary word is essential A water
to this text?
B barns
A built C cooking
B climate D grazing land
C cities
D pastures

for tremendous?
A enormous
B unimportant
C silly
D grateful

WEEK 17
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Some places have many natural resources such as coal, iron, or trees. Other places
do not. What happens to people who live in places without many natural resources? How
1. Y N
can they get them? People who lived in early cities solved this problem. They developed
a system of trade. People who lived in places with many natural resources traded those
resources. They got goods such as clothes and tools. People who lived in places without
natural resources made goods. They traded those goods for the things they needed. For 2. Y N
example, they traded goods for iron and lumber. Trading allowed people to get what they
needed. It also allowed different people to communicate. This meant that people could
learn from one another. It also meant that people passed their language and culture along.
This is called cultural diffusion. 3. Y N
1. Which action is not a result of trade? 4. What type of sentence is the 4. Y N

following: How can they get them?
A People did not settle into cities.
B A an imperative sentence
People could learn from one another. 5. Y N
C People could get what they needed.
B an exclamatory sentence
D People passed their language and

C an interrogatory sentence
culture along. D a declarative sentence
___ / 5
2. Which title best fits this text? 5. Which word or phrase means Total
the passing along of culture and
A Trading Resources language?
B Lumber and Iron A trading
C Communication B natural resources
D Cultural Roots C cultural diffusion
D a system
3. Which is not a natural resource?
A coal
B iron
C trees
D houses

WEEK 17
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Where it All Began

Thousands of years ago, people did not live in cities. Instead, they moved around. They
followed herds of animals and hunted. They gathered nuts, seeds, and other food as well. Then,
people learned how to grow crops and herd animals. That meant that they could live in one
place. The question was: Where would be a good place for people to settle? The first cities
arose where they did for some very good reasons.
One reason that cities developed where they did is rivers. The city-state of Sumer
(sue-MARE) was one early civilization. It developed in the Middle East. It was between the
Tigris (TAHY-gris) and Euphrates (yoo-FREY-teez) rivers. The Indus (IN-duhs) Valley civilization
was in India. It was located near the Indus River. The first Chinese civilizations developed near
the Huang He, or Yellow River. The first cities in Egypt were built near the Nile River. Rivers
were very important because they provided many things. They provided an easy source of water
for drinking, cooking, and more. They also served as a good source of food. They also allowed
people to travel more. Later, people used rivers for transportation.
The first cities were located in warm, pleasant climates. People needed warm climates so that
they could grow crops and have pastures for their animals. All of the earliest cities were located
in warm climates with plenty of rain.
Not all cities had everything people needed. So people developed a system of trade. They
traded goods they made. They got natural resources from other places. They also learned from
one another. They spread their own cultures and languages. That process is called cultural
diffusion. Gradually, cities became larger, and more people lived in them. But it all started with
a good source of water and a warm climate.
W E
S
Ancient Sumer

WEEK 17
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Where It All Began” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What does the map tell you 5. What is the author’s purpose?
about Sumer?
A to persuade 1. Y N
A It is in India. B to inform
B It is in Egypt. C to entertain
C It is in Iraq. D to instruct
2. Y N
D It is in South America.
6. Why do you think the earliest cities 3. Y N

2. What could a reader do to were not located in Alaska?
understand how to pronounce the
word Euphrates? A There are no rivers in Alaska.
4. Y N
A Check the pronunciation guide.
B There are too many rivers in Alaska.
B Read the title again.

C The climate is too hot.
C Read the first sentence again.

D The climate is too cold. 5. Y N
D Look at the map.

7. Why did people long ago
travel around? 6. Y N
3. What happened after people settled
in cities? A They didn’t know how to build cities.
A They gathered nuts, seeds, and

B They had to follow animals and 7. Y N
gather food from different places
other food.
to survive.
B They followed herds of animals. C They had no materials to build
C They developed a system of trade. homes with. 8. Y N
D They moved around a lot. D They did not want to live near
other people.
4. Which happened first?

___ / 8
8. What would happen if there was
A People learned to grow crops. no trade? Total
B People began to trade with people in A There would not be cultural diffusion.
other cities.
C People built cities near rivers.
B People would get the things
they needed.
D People followed herds of animals. C There would not be enough rivers.
D People would travel much more.

WEEK 17
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Where It All Began.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
Imagine you could start your own city. Where would you put it? Why? Explain
your answer.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 18
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Stephanie’s best friend, Lindsey, was having a birthday in a few weeks. The problem
was that Stephanie had no idea what to get her. She didn’t want to get Lindsey clothes
or jewelry—everyone did that. Stephanie wanted her gift to be extra special. It didn’t help 1. Y N
matters that Stephanie didn’t have a lot of money to spend. Whatever she got for Lindsey
would have to be inexpensive. Stephanie thought about it for days but couldn’t come up with
any good ideas. Her mom usually had good ideas for presents. But even she couldn’t think
of an idea that Stephanie liked. As Lindsey’s birthday got closer, Stephanie became more 2. Y N
and more worried. What if she couldn’t think of anything at all? She couldn’t skip her best
friend’s birthday, but she didn’t want to go to Lindsey’s party without a good present.
3. Y N
1. What is the character’s problem in 3. Which word is an antonym

this text? for inexpensive? 4. Y N
A Stephanie’s birthday is coming soon, A costly

and she doesn’t want presents. B cheap
B 5. Y N
Stephanie can’t think of a good C comfortable
birthday present for her mom.
C Stephanie can’t think of a good
D colorful
birthday present for her best friend.
D Stephanie’s best friend Lindsey is 4. What is the correct meaning of the ___ / 5
angry with her. verb skip in this text? Total
A hop
2. Why doesn’t Stephanie want to get
B bounce
Lindsey clothes or jewelry?
C miss
A Lindsey doesn’t like clothes
D
or jewelry. discuss
B Her mom doesn’t want Stephanie to

buy those things. 5. What does the phrase come up
C with mean?
Everyone says that clothes and
jewelry are a bad idea.
A climb up
D Everyone does that, and Stephanie
B
wants her gift to be extra special. think of
C stand
D run around

WEEK 18
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Stephanie was worried because she couldn’t think of a good birthday present for her
best friend, Lindsey. And Lindsey’s birthday was coming up soon. Stephanie would have to
1. Y N
think of something fast. Finally, Stephanie decided that the best thing to do was just to ask
Lindsey what she wanted. So one day, when Lindsey came over, Stephanie did just that. To
Stephanie’s shock, Lindsey said, “Forget about the whole birthday thing. Something terrible
2. Y N has happened! My parents just told me we’re moving! I don’t even want to think about my
birthday! I don’t even think I want presents.” Both girls sat silently for a while. Stephanie
couldn’t believe this was happening! Her best friend was leaving her and there was nothing
she could do about it. This was much worse than not having the perfect birthday present
3. Y N for Lindsey.
4. Y N 1. Why doesn’t Lindsey want 3. What does the word terrible tell you
birthday presents? about Lindsey?
A She cannot think of anything to A She is very happy.

5. Y N
give Stephanie. B She is upset.
B She already has everything C She is curious about something.
she wants.
C Her parents told her she cannot
D She is asleep.
___ / 5 have presents.
Total D Her family is moving, and she is 4. What kind of sentence is the
upset about it. following: My parents just told me
we’re moving!
2. How does Stephanie feel about A exclamatory

Lindsey moving?
B interrogative
A excited C imperative
B unhappy D declarative
C jealous
D curious 5. What is the phrase was worried an
example of?
A a metaphor
B a simile
C alliteration
D personification

WEEK 18
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Stephanie couldn’t think of a good birthday gift for her best friend, Lindsey. She thought
that was the worst of her troubles until Lindsey told her the bad news. Lindsey and her
1. Y N
family were moving! Stephanie was terribly upset about it. Still, she wanted to give Lindsey
a present. After a lot of thought, Stephanie finally hit on exactly the right present. She had
a lot of good pictures of things she and Lindsey had done together. She also had plenty
of pictures of places they’d been to and friends they shared. Stephanie decided she would 2. Y N
make a photo album for Lindsey. First, she got Mom to take her to the store to buy just the
right album. Then, she put all of the pictures together into the album. She labeled each
picture and then added her own drawings. Finally, the photo album was done. Stephanie
was really hoping Lindsey would like it. 3. Y N
1. Who is the main character in 4. If the author didn’t want to use the 4. Y N
this text? verb labeled, which verb has the
same meaning?
A Lindsey
A drew 5. Y N
B Mom
C Stephanie
B titled
D Dad
C colored
D pasted ___ / 5
2. What will Stephanie give Lindsey for Total
her birthday? 5. Which word indicates that you are
about to read a set of steps in order?
A a photo album full of pictures
B a label maker
A pictures
C new music
B album
D a drawing of a photo album

C first
D drawings
3. What does the phrase hit on mean?
A smacked
B played baseball
C won
D thought of

WEEK 18
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
The Best Birthday Present Ever

Stephanie’s best friend Lindsey was about to have a birthday. But neither girl felt like
celebrating. Lindsey had just found out that she and her parents would be moving. The girls
were heartbroken about it. But Stephanie still wanted to do something nice on Lindsey’s
birthday. So she’d made Lindsey a special photo album full of pictures. The pictures were of
things the two girls had done together and friends they had made.
Lindsey’s parents had said she could have a birthday party. But Lindsey didn’t really want
one. She just wanted Stephanie to come over for a while and keep her company. So on the day
of Lindsey’s birthday, Stephanie went over to her house with the photo album she’d made. When
she got there, she gave Lindsey her present. Lindsey opened it reluctantly—she really wasn’t in
the mood for gifts. But then she saw the photo album and couldn’t resist taking a peek inside. In
no time at all, she and Stephanie were laughing at some of the pictures. They talked about the
friends in other pictures and reminded each other of the good times they had had.
After a while, both girls began to feel just a little bit better. Then, Lindsey’s father came into
the living room where the girls were sitting. “I just talked to your parents,” he told Stephanie.
“I asked them if you could stay overnight, and they said that would be fine.” Stephanie and
Lindsey looked at each other and then both squealed. They hugged each other, and then they
hugged Lindsey’s father. Maybe Lindsey was going to be moving, but that didn’t mean the girls
couldn’t enjoy the time they still had.
That night, Stephanie and Lindsey

watched movies. They stuffed themselves
with pizza and popcorn. They played
video games, too. They stayed up very
late and fell asleep in the living room with
the TV still on. In the morning, Stephanie
got ready to leave. Lindsey told her, “I’m
so glad you came over, and I love this
photo album! It’s the best birthday present
I have ever gotten!”

WEEK 18
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Read “The Best Birthday Present Ever” and then answer
Directions the questions.
SCORE
1. Why do you think Lindsey isn’t in the 5. What is one purpose for reading
mood for gifts? this text?
1. Y N
A She’s angry because nobody A to learn about how to give the perfect
remembered her birthday. birthday present
B She already has too many gifts. B to enjoy a story of two good friends 2. Y N
C It isn’t her birthday. C to find out about birthday parties
D She is sad that her family is moving. D to learn how to wrap a present
3. Y N
2. How do the two girls likely feel on the 6. Which inference can be made based
morning after the sleepover? on the text?
4. Y N
A rested A Lindsey does not like the photo
B album that Stephanie gives her.
angry
C exhausted
B Lindsey’s father does not want 5. Y N
Stephanie to stay overnight.
D startled C The two girls have never met before.
D The two girls are surprised when 6. Y N
3. How does Lindsey likely feel about Lindsey’s father invites Stephanie to
Stephanie coming to her house? stay overnight.
A grateful 7. Y N
B frightened
7. How do you think Stephanie feels
about giving Lindsey a photo album?
C jealous
A pleased 8. Y N
D worried
B ashamed
4. Which prediction is most likely?

C jealous
D not sure ___ / 8
A Lindsey will not speak to
Stephanie again. Total
B Stephanie will visit Lindsey in her
8. Why is the gift so special to Lindsey?
new house. A She told Stephanie that was what
C Stephanie will be upset with Lindsey. she wanted for her birthday.
D Lindsey will not keep the B It was expensive.
photo album. C It will remind her of her best friend,
Stephanie, after she moves.
D Lindsey enjoys photography.
WEEK 18
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “The Best Birthday Present Ever.” Then, read the prompt and
SCORE
___ / 4
Have you ever had a good friend move away? Have you ever moved away from a
good friend? Write about what happened and what it was like, or what it might be like
to move.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 19
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
What’s the first thing you should do if there is an emergency? Your best choice is almost
always to call 911. When you call 911, your call will be answered by a dispatcher, who will 1. Y N
find out what your emergency is and send help. The dispatcher will ask you questions to
help decide whether you need a police officer, an ambulance, a fire truck, or other help. The
dispatcher may also give you some instructions. After that, the dispatcher will send help.
What should you do when you call 911? Take a deep breath before you call. That way, 2. Y N
you will be able to tell the dispatcher what the emergency is. Give the dispatcher as many
details as you can. That way, the dispatcher will know what kind of help to send. Follow the
dispatcher’s instructions carefully. Then, wait for help to arrive.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which is an interrogative sentence? 4. Y N
A how to become a police officer A Follow the dispatcher’s instructions

B carefully.
what ambulances do 5. Y N
C calling 911
B The dispatcher may also give you
some instructions.
D dispatchers C Then, wait for help to arrive.
D What should you do when you ___ / 5
2. Which action is not something that call 911?
happens during a 911 call? Total
A A dispatcher asks questions. 5. Who are the people who answer

emergency calls and send help?
B The dispatcher goes to the scene of
the emergency. A instructions
C The dispatcher gives instructions. B police officers
D The dispatcher decides what kind of C emergencies
help to send.
D dispatchers

for instructions?
A directions
B information
C dispatchers
D emergencies

WEEK 19
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Would you be prepared to help if your best friend were choking on something? You would
if you’ve learned the Heimlich maneuver (HYM-lick muh-NOO-ver). The Heimlich maneuver
1. Y N
is a special procedure that helps people who are choking to expel, or push out, the object
that is caught in their throats. Follow these steps to perform the Heimlich maneuver:
2. Y N 1. Stand behind the choking person and wrap your arms around his or her waist.
2. Make a fist and place the thumb side of your fist against the person’s upper abdomen,
below the rib cage and above the navel (belly button).
3. Y N
3. Grasp your fist with your other hand and press into the person’s upper abdomen with
a quick upward thrust. Do not squeeze the person’s rib cage; confine the force of the
thrust to your hands.
4. Y N
4. Keep thrusting with your fist until the choking person expels the object.
5. Y N
1. What does this text explain? 3. Which word means to push
something out?
A how to perform the
Heimlich maneuver A fist
___ / 5 B how to eat carefully so you B expel
Total won’t choke C choke
C why people sometimes choke D wrap
D the history of the Heimlich maneuver
4. What does the verb thrust refer to?
2. How does the text feature below help A part of the body
a reader?
(HYM-lick muh-NOO-ver) B type of food
A It tells readers a word’s part

C kind of push
of speech. D safety tip
B It tells readers how to spell a word.
C It tells readers how to pronounce 5. Which term from the text means a
a word. way of doing things?
D It tells readers how to write a word. A rib cage
B procedure
C expel
D choke
WEEK 19
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
How can you help if someone gets seriously cut? If it is a very serious cut, call 911 or
call for other help immediately. While you’re waiting, you can help stop the bleeding. Deep
1. Y N
and serious cuts can lead to a lot of blood loss, and that’s dangerous, so it’s extremely
important to stop the bleeding. Start by covering the wound with cloth. The best kind of
cloth is gauze. Many large bandages are made of gauze. But if there’s no gauze available,
a towel is almost as effective. If you’re outside or someplace without towels, even a shirt will 2. Y N
work. After you’ve covered up the wound, put pressure directly on the covering. Pressure
causes the blood to clot and the wound to close up so that it can heal. Don’t take the cloth
off the wound; otherwise, you’ll open up the wound and the blood cannot clot as well. Keep
pressure on the wound until medical help arrives. 3. Y N
1. What is the first step to stop 3. Which word is a synonym 4. Y N

bleeding? for otherwise?
A Put pressure on the wound. A or else

5. Y N
B Cover the wound with cloth. B also
C Do not take the cloth off the wound. C immediately
D Keep pressure on the wound until D necessary
help arrives. ___ / 5
4. Which noun describes a special Total
2. Why is it important to follow steps to kind of cloth used in many
stop bleeding? large bandages?
A Put pressure on the wound. A clot

B Pressure causes the blood to clot and B pressure
the wound to close. C towel
C Serious cuts can lead to blood loss, D gauze
which is dangerous.
D Don’t take the cloth off the wound.
5. What is the tone of the text?
A informative
B silly
C persuasive
D mysterious

WEEK 19
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Emergency!
Nobody likes to think about being in an emergency, but they happen. If you know what
to do when there is an emergency, you can save lives. In most emergencies, the best thing
you can do is call 911. The 911 emergency system is set up to get people the help they need
immediately. When you call 911, the dispatcher finds out what kind of help you need. Then the
dispatcher gives you instructions for what to do while you wait for help. Next, the dispatcher
sends help to you. It is very important to remember that 911 is only for emergencies. So don’t
call 911 unless you really need to; otherwise, people with emergencies might not be able to get
through. If you do have a real emergency, the 911 system is there to help.
There are some other things you can learn

to do that can save lives. One of them is the
Heimlich maneuver. The Heimlich maneuver is
used to help people who are choking expel the
object that is making them choke. Learning how
to do the Heimlich maneuver is not difficult, and
it could save a life. So practice it and be able to
use it in case you ever need to do so.
Another thing that you can learn to do in an

emergency is to stop bleeding. Losing a lot of
blood is very dangerous. So if someone is badly
cut, the most important thing to do right away is
to stop the bleeding. Applying direct pressure to
a wound is the best way to do that. It’s best to
cover the wound first with gauze, but if you don’t
have gauze, a towel or even a shirt will work.
Covering a wound and putting direct pressure on
it will help stop bleeding and could save a life.

WEEK 19
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Emergency!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which sentence supports the idea 5. Why might the author mention the
that you can learn to stop bleeding? Heimlich maneuver?
1. Y N
A When you call 911, the dispatcher A It is very expensive and does not
finds out what kind of help you need. always work.
B One of them is the B It is not hard to learn and it can save 2. Y N
Heimlich Maneuver. lives.
C Applying direct pressure to a wound C Only adults can learn it.
is the best way to do that. D It is too dangerous for people to use. 3. Y N
D If you do have a real emergency, the
911 system is there to help.
6. How might a person feel after helping
someone in an emergency? 4. Y N
2. What could happen if too many
people call 911 when there is not an A hungry
emergency?
B angry 5. Y N
A There would be no emergencies. C tired
B There would be fewer emergencies. D proud
C People would call 911. 6. Y N
D People with real emergencies might 7. Which question is answered in

not get help. this text?
7. Y N
A What happens when you call 911?
3. The author wants readers to
B Why do emergencies happen?
A have an emergency. C How many people choke every year? 8. Y N
B know what to do in an emergency. D What happens when people go to

C the hospital?
call 911 when it is not necessary.
D lose a lot of blood. ___ / 8
8. Which summarizes what this
text explains? Total
4. A 911 dispatcher must be
A where to buy gauze
A mean and judgmental. B how to be a dispatcher
B calm and helpful. C what to do in an emergency
C able to drive an ambulance. D the way to the nearest hospital
D a nurse.

WEEK 19
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Emergency!” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Have you ever been in an emergency? If so, write about what happened and what you
did. If not, write about how you would respond to an emergency.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 20
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Paul usually took the bus to and from school, but today, his mom picked him up. He had
an appointment at the dentist, and they needed to be there on time. When they arrived
at the dentist’s office, Paul signed in, and he and his mom took seats in the waiting room. 1. Y N
Soon, Paul’s name was called, and he followed the dental hygienist (hahy-JEN-ist) back to
an exam room. The dental hygienist cleaned Paul’s teeth and took X-rays of them. A few
minutes later, the dentist examined Paul’s teeth, too, and looked at the X-rays. The dentist
2. Y N
told Paul that he didn’t have any cavities, and that was good news. But the dentist had other
news: Paul was going to need braces.
3. Y N
1. What is the setting of the text? 4. Which word is an antonym

of arrived?
A the supermarket 4. Y N
B Paul’s home
A visited
C school
B came
D the dentist’s office

C departed 5. Y N
D noticed
2. What news does the dentist give

to Paul? 5. What does the suffix –ist in
___ / 5
hygienist mean?
A Paul has a cavity. Total
B Paul will need braces.
A clean
C Paul will not need braces.

B a person who does something
D Paul’s teeth are not clean.

C a dentist
D greater than
3. What is a dental hygienist?
A a person who cleans teeth

B a person who fixes cavities
C a person who does not work
with teeth
D a person who does not take X-rays

WEEK 20
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Paul’s dentist told him that he was going to need braces and recommended that Paul see
an orthodontist. The orthodontist would work with Paul to straighten his teeth. Paul’s mother
1. Y N
made an appointment at the orthodontist’s office. The first step was to find out exactly
what kind of work Paul’s teeth would need, so the orthodontist took special X-rays of Paul’s
teeth and gums. Then, she, Paul, and Paul’s mom sat down to discuss what needed to be
2. Y N done. She explained that Paul’s teeth were slightly crowded and that braces would help
move and separate them. She also said that Paul had a slight overbite. That meant that his
upper teeth overlapped his lower teeth a little. Both problems could easily be corrected with
braces, so Paul and his mom decided to get started.
3. Y N
1. How does Paul find out that he 3. What is an orthodontist?

4. Y N needs braces?
A a special kind of dentist who studies
A His friend told him he needs braces. the heart and lungs
5. Y N B His mom told him he needs braces. B a special kind of dentist who
C creates overbites
His dad told him he needs braces.
D His dentist told him he needs braces.
C a special kind of dentist who
straightens teeth
___ / 5
D a special kind of dentist who makes
2. What does the orthodontist explain toothbrushes and toothpaste
Total about Paul’s teeth?
A Paul’s teeth are slightly crowded, and 4. Which part of speech is work in the
he has a slight overbite. phrase kind of work?
B Paul’s teeth are too small for A noun
his mouth.
C Paul is missing several teeth.
B verb
D Paul does not need braces after all.

C adjective
D all of the above
5. Which word or phrase has the same

meaning as the word discuss?
A talk about
B ignore
C work on
D purchase

WEEK 20
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Paul needed braces for his teeth, so he and his mother went to the orthodontist to get
started. The orthodontist told them what to expect. She explained that everyone is different,
so not everyone wears braces for the same amount of time. But she gave Paul and his mom 1. Y N
a good idea of what would probably happen. After Paul got his braces, he would probably
wear them for two years. Every couple of months, he would go to the orthodontist for a
checkup. He would also get his braces adjusted. After about two years, Paul would get his
braces removed. He would then get a retainer to help keep his teeth straightened. At first, 2. Y N
Paul would need the retainer all the time, but gradually, he would wear it less often. After
about another six months, he probably wouldn’t need the retainer.
3. Y N
1. Which statement is not true? 3. Which word is defined as a device

that helps keep teeth straightened?
4. Y N
A Paul will wear his braces for about
two years. A X-ray
B Paul will wear a retainer after his B dentist
5. Y N
braces are removed. C checkup
C Everyone wears braces for the same D retainer
amount of time.
D Paul will go to the orthodontist to get
his braces adjusted. 4. What does the adverb gradually tell ___ / 5
you about Paul’s use of a retainer?
Total
2. Why will Paul need to go to the
A He would stop wearing his retainer
orthodontist every couple of months? little by little.
B He would not wear a retainer at all.
A to get his hearing and vision checked
C He would suddenly stop wearing
B for checkups and to get his his retainer.
braces adjusted
D He would get his braces removed.
C to get his braces removed every
few months
D so his mom can get her braces 5. Which prefix can be added to
adjusted to make a word meaning
checked
badly adjusted?
A hemo–
B super–
C pro–
D mal–

WEEK 20
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Smile!
Paul was going to get braces on his teeth. He and his mother had talked to the orthodontist
about what was going to happen, so he was prepared, but he was still a little nervous. Before
Paul could have his braces put on, the orthodontist had to know the size and shape of his mouth
and teeth so the braces would be the right size. So one day, Paul went to the orthodontist’s
office to get molds made of his teeth.
When he arrived for his appointment, Paul

sat down in the orthodontist’s chair. First, one
of the technicians gave him a strip of wax to
bite. That would show the size of his mouth.
Then, the technician prepared two trays of
what looked like clay. He explained that those
trays were filled with a special kind of paste.
He placed them in Paul’s mouth and asked
him to bite down. The paste didn’t taste bad,
but it did feel weird in Paul’s mouth, and it felt
strange to have to keep his tongue out of the
way. The technician left the trays in Paul’s
mouth for a few minutes and then carefully
removed them. He explained that the paste
would harden into the same shape as Paul’s
mouth and teeth. When the molds were
finished, the technician handed Paul a paper
cup of water and showed him where to rinse
out his mouth. Finally, another technician took
photographs of Paul’s teeth, mouth, and jaws.
Then, the appointment was over. Paul was
relieved to realize that it hadn’t hurt at all.
Two weeks later, Paul’s mother got a call to tell her that Paul’s braces were ready. So they
went to the orthodontist’s office again to have the braces put on. Paul was surprised that it didn’t
hurt to have the braces put on. After the orthodontist was finished, though, Paul’s teeth started
to hurt. The orthodontist explained that Paul would be uncomfortable for a few days, but his
teeth wouldn’t hurt for long. And she was right! Within a few days, Paul was getting used to the
braces, and before long, he often forgot he had them.

WEEK 20
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Smile!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which statement is supported by 5. This text is told in
the illustration?
A third-person point of view. 1. Y N
A The story is about going to school. B first-person point of view.
B The story is about taking pictures. C second-person point of view.
C The story is about getting braces. D There is no point of view.
2. Y N
D The story is about feeling scared.
6. What is a reasonable prediction? 3. Y N

2. Using context clues, what does
technician mean? A Paul will visit the orthodontist
for checkups.
A a person who likes technology B Paul will not go to the
4. Y N
B a person who makes dental tools orthodontist again.

C a medical doctor C Paul will have his braces
removed tomorrow. 5. Y N
D a child’s dentist
D Paul will get braces again.
3. Why do you think Paul is a little 6. Y N

nervous before getting his braces? 7. Why does the orthodontist need to
know the size and shape of Paul’s
A He does not know what braces are. mouth and teeth?
7. Y N
B He is afraid it will hurt to get braces. A to know how tall Paul has grown
C His mom does not know Paul B so Paul will have his braces for a
needs braces. longer time 8. Y N
D The orthodontist did not tell Paul C so Paul’s braces will fit properly
what is going to happen.
D so Paul’s braces will be the right color
4. Why does Paul need to rinse his

___ / 8
mouth out? 8. What might have happened if the
orthodontist had not prepared Paul Total
A He had paste in his mouth. for getting braces?
B He is very thirsty. A Paul would know exactly what

C He just ate something that would happen.
tasted terrible. B Paul might be even more nervous
D He has just brushed his teeth. about getting braces.
C Paul would not need to get braces.
D Paul’s mom might need to get braces.
WEEK 20
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Smile!” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Do you have braces? What was it like to get them? If you do not have braces, does
someone you know have braces? What do you think it would be like? Write about
what it was like or what it would be like.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 21
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Track and field events are an important part of the Olympic Games. When many people
think of the Olympics, they think about track and field events first. Track and field events
1. Y N
involve running, jumping, and throwing and are usually held at a stadium with an oval
running track. There are three kinds of running events: sprints, middle-distance races,
and long-distance races. Sprints are short races. Runners win them by going as fast as
possible. Sprinting events are very old; they have been around for thousands of years. 2. Y N
Middle- and long-distance races require more stamina (STAM-min-uh), or endurance. In
those races, it is more important to keep going for a long time than to go fast. Some running
events are relay races. Those races are for teams of runners.
3. Y N
1. Which is not a kind of track and 4. What type of race does a team of
field event? runners compete in? 4. Y N
A running A sprint
B jumping B stamina 5. Y N
C throwing C relay
D swimming D middle-distance
___ / 5
2. What do middle-distance and 5. What is the tone of the text?
long-distance races require? Total
A informative
A speed B silly
B stamina C persuasive
C practice D serious
D a team of runners
3. Which word is a synonym for

endurance?
A stamina
B sprint
C relay
D oval

WEEK 21
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Running events are not the only track and field events. There are also several jumping
events. In those events, the goal is to jump as high or as far as possible. For example, in
1. Y N
the long jump, athletes run for a short distance to a jumping board and a sandpit. They
use the jumping board to try to jump as far as they can. In the high jump, the idea is to get
as much height as possible when the athlete jumps. In that event, athletes run for a short
2. Y N distance, and then they take off from one foot and jump over a raised bar. In the pole vault,
athletes run along a runway holding a long pole. When they get to the end of the runway,
they plant one end of the pole in a metal box and use the pole to jump over a very high bar.
3. Y N
1. What is true for both the high jump 4. In which sentence below is the word
and the pole vault? foot used as a noun?
4. Y N
A Athletes jump over a metal bar. A My mom does not want to foot the bill
B for dinner.
Athletes jump into a sandpit.
5. Y N
C Athletes jump into water.
B The child walked a foot or two
before crying.
D Athletes jump onto a horse. C My favorite sport is football.
D What time does the foot race start?
___ / 5 2. Which is true of all three
jumping events?
Total 5. What does the phrase take off mean
A Athletes start by throwing something. in this text?
B Athletes start by carrying a pole. A remove
C Athletes start by diving. B leave the ground
D Athletes start by running for a C cut off
short distance.
D copy
3. What does the word plant mean in

this text?
A to put a seed in the ground

B a factory
C to place firmly
D to colonize

WEEK 21
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Some track and field events involve throwing things. For all of those events, the goal is
to see how far the athlete can throw an object. One of the throwing events is called the
shot put. Shot putters try to “put,” or throw, the “shot,” a 16-pound ball, as far as possible. 1. Y N
In the javelin (JAV-lin) throw, athletes try to throw a javelin, which is a little like a spear, as
far as possible. The discus throw is one of the oldest track and field events. It was one of
the original Olympic events in the games held in ancient Greece. Discus throwers compete
2. Y N
with a 4.4-pound disc, and each athlete tries to hurl the discus as far as possible. The final
throwing event is the hammer throw. In this event, athletes compete using a heavy metal
ball that is attached to a wire and a handle.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which noun is similar in meaning to

a spear? 4. Y N
A throwing the javelin
B ancient Greece
A discus
C track and field throwing events

B hammer 5. Y N
D hammers and other tools

C shot
D javelin
2. How are javelin throwers and shot

___ / 5
putters alike? 5. What type of sentence is the
following: Discus throwers compete Total
A Neither are athletes. with a 4.4-pound disc, and each
athlete tries to hurl the discus as far
B Both throw something that looks like as possible.
a spear.
C Both throw a 16-pound ball. A a simple sentence
D Both try to throw something as far B a compound sentence
as possible. C a complex sentence
D an interrogatory sentence
3. Which word is a synonym for throw?
A hurl
B discus
C compete
D javelin

WEEK 21
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
On Your Mark, Get Set, Go!

The Story of Wilma Rudolph
Many athletes start playing sports when they are little children. But nobody would have
expected Wilma Rudolph to be an athlete. Wilma was born in 1940 near Clarksville, Tennessee.
At the time she was born, there was only one doctor in town who would treat African Americans.
Besides, the Rudolph family was very poor. So Wilma’s mother had to help her daughter
through many illnesses. Then, Wilma developed polio and lost the use of her leg. Today, there
is a vaccine for polio, but there wasn’t one then. So the doctor told Wilma’s family that she would
probably never walk. But everyone in the family worked very hard to help get Wilma on her feet.
Wilma worked very hard, too. Eventually, she was able to walk and then, run.
Wilma liked sports, so when she was ready for high school, she decided to play basketball.
Two years later, she was noticed. The head coach of the women’s track team at Tennessee
State University saw her play. She was such a good athlete that he wanted her to be on his
track team. Wilma became a track and field star in college. Then, she headed for the Olympic
Games. She won a bronze medal in the 1956 Olympic Games. Then, she won three gold
medals in the 1960 Olympic Games.
After her Olympic career was over, Wilma

did many other things. She coached at her
old high school and at other schools, and
worked on sports programs on television.
She also worked for a group that helped poor
children from the inner city to learn track and
field skills. All of these things were done by
a woman people said would never be able
to walk! Wilma died in 1994, but she is still
remembered as one of the fastest women
in the world and as a reminder of what hard
work can accomplish.
Wilma Rudolph

WEEK 21
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Read “On Your Mark, Get Set, Go! The Story of Wilma Rudolph” and
Directions then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What did Wilma do before she went 5. What is a reason for reading
to college? this text?
1. Y N
A worked on sports programs A to read about the history
on television of Tennessee
B taught at her old high school B to try track and field events 2. Y N
C went to the Olympics C to understand Wilma Rudolph’s life
D played basketball in high school D to learn how to run faster
3. Y N
2. What do you think might happen if 6. Which is an accurate opinion

Wilma were born today? of Wilma?
4. Y N
A She would not have polio. A She is funny.
B She would not be an athlete. B She is athletic.
C She would never be able to walk. C She is artistic. 5. Y N
D She would not go to high school. D She is musical.
6. Y N
3. How did Wilma’s family likely feel 7. Which word from the text gives a
when she won her Olympic medals? good summary of Wilma’s life?
A excited and proud A Olympics 7. Y N
B frightened and anxious B woman

C angry and jealous C accomplishment
8. Y N
D confused D polio
4. Why would nobody have expected 8. What is remarkable about Wilma’s

Wilma to be an athlete? Olympic career?
___ / 8
A Her parents did not think playing A Women usually did not compete in Total
sports was a good idea. the Olympics at that time.
B She was afraid to be active. B She did not enjoy sports.
C She hated sports. C She was born in 1940.
D She had polio and could not walk. D She had polio when she was young,
and doctors said she probably would
never walk.

WEEK 21
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “On Your Mark, Get Set, Go! The Story of Wilma Rudolph.”
Directions Then, read the prompt and respond on the lines below.
SCORE
___ / 4
Wilma Rudolph had to work very hard to learn to walk and run. What do you have
to work very hard to do? Write about what you work very hard at doing and what you
have accomplished.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 22
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Sara noticed the letter among the rest of the letters in the day’s mail. She grabbed it
excitedly and ripped it open. After hastily scanning its contents, she rushed into the kitchen
waving it. “My information’s here!” she yelled joyfully to her father. The letter was from the
1. Y N
U.S. Space and Rocket Center; it contained information Sara would need for her upcoming
Space Academy week. Sara had always enjoyed science, especially space science, so
when she first learned about Space Academy, she was determined to go. She and her 2. Y N
parents had checked the website, found out information, and planned her trip. She was
thrilled to know she’d be among the students who would be going this year.
3. Y N
1. Why is Sara so excited? 4. Which word is a synonym for thrilled?
A She is going to Space Academy. A dejected 4. Y N
B She has been accepted for B delighted

band camp. C confused
C She has won a prize. 5. Y N
D aware
D She has found a lot of money.
5. What do the words hastily scanning

2. What does Sara like to study? tell you about Sara’s actions? ___ / 5
A social studies A She does not understand the letter. Total
B history B She reads the letter very carefully.
C art C She glances at the letter very quickly.
D science D She does not receive the letter.
3. Which suffix could replace –ful in the

word joyful to make its antonym?
A –ous
B –less
C –ish
D –tion

WEEK 22
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Sara would be leaving the next day for a week at Space Academy, so today, she was
packing her things. She and her parents had discussed what she would need for the trip,
1. Y N
and they had downloaded a guide from the Space Academy website. Now, Sara checked
the guide as she looked at the things she planned to put into her suitcase. Her bed was
heaped with things, and now she had to sort everything out and pack. The guide suggested
2. Y N bringing towels and a swimsuit as well as clothes. Sara would also need comfortable shoes,
socks, sleepwear, and a jacket. She’d also be bringing her brush and comb, toothbrush,
soap, and shampoo. Sara checked everything off on the guide and then put things into her
suitcase. She wasn’t sure everything would fit, but she managed to get everything into one
3. Y N bag. Sara was ready to go!
4. Y N
1. Where does this story take place? 4. Which of these sentences has a
compound subject?
A Space Academy
5. Y N B school
A Sara was ready to go!
C Sara’s room
B Now, Sara checked the guide as she
looked at the things she planned to
D the living room put into her suitcase.
C Sara checked everything off on
___ / 5 the guide and then put things into
Total
2. Which of these is not something
her suitcase.
Sara will bring?
D She and her parents had discussed
A winter boots what she would need for the trip.
B a swimsuit
C clothes 5. Which word or phrase has the same
meaning as as well as?
D shoes and socks
A along with
3. Which word is a synonym B instead of
for heaped? C underneath
A lots D in place of
B piled
C messy
D empty

WEEK 22
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Sara was on her way to Space Academy for a week. She was a little nervous about
traveling alone, but she was excited to be going. Her mom and dad drove her to the airport
1. Y N
and made sure that she boarded the right airplane. Space Academy is in Huntsville,
Alabama, so it would be a long flight. When Sara got on board the plane, she settled herself
into her seat and prepared for takeoff. The flight left on time, and before she knew it, they
were in the air. After a four-hour flight, the plane landed in Alabama. Sara got off the plane 2. Y N
and looked around for the Space Academy staff who would take her to the training center.
Soon, she spotted the person in the Space Academy uniform, just as the online guide had
said she would. She and the other kids who were going to Space Academy got on a bus,
and soon, they were on their way. 3. Y N
1. How is Sara getting to the 4. In the word aboard, what does the 4. Y N
training center? prefix a– mean?
A by train A over
5. Y N
B by air B not
C her mom and dad are driving her C on or in
D by boat D under
___ / 5
2. Why is Sara a little nervous? 5. What is the meaning of the phrase Total
before she knew it?
A The flight is very late.
B Her parents are angry with her.
A Sara does not know the flight
is leaving.
C She does not want to go to B The flight takes off quickly.
space camp.
D She is traveling alone.
C Sara is afraid to fly.
D The flight is delayed.
3. What part of speech is spotted in

this text?
A noun
B verb
C pronoun
D adjective

WEEK 22
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Sara Blasts Off

August 12, 2012
Dear Mom and Dad,
You have no idea what a busy week I’m having at Space Academy! Our schedule is full every
day, but what we’re doing is amazing and fun! We get up in the morning at 7:00 a.m. and have
breakfast, and then it’s time for our mission briefing. We work in teams, so each team has a mission
to accomplish. Our team is making a two-stage rocket, and we’re hoping it will launch. After our
mission briefing and some work with the team, it’s time for lunch.
When lunch is over, we do some other activities. Yesterday, I tried out the one-sixteenth Gravity
Chair! It’s a chair that makes you feel the way you’d feel if you were on the moon, where there’s a lot
less gravity than there is on Earth. Tomorrow, I want to try the Manned Maneuvering Unit—that’s
a special room that lets you feel what it’s like to work without any friction. I hope I’ll also get to
experiment with the Five Degrees of Freedom Chair—they call it the 5DF. That’s a special kind of
chair that moves you back and forth—even upside down!
We do other kinds of things, too. For example, the

training center has a rock climber and a mobility trainer.
There’s a pool, too, and we do water activities. It’s a good
thing I brought my swimsuit!
I’m really having an amazing time. I’m so glad I

came, even though I was a little nervous at first. But I miss
you guys, and I’ll be glad to come home, too. Graduation
from Space Academy will be on Friday afternoon—you’ll be
there, right? I want you to meet some of my friends and see
the planetarium and the museum.
It’s almost time for “lights out,” so I’d

better finish this. I’ll call you on Thursday
morning before our mission briefing.
Love,
Sara

WEEK 22
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Sara Blasts Off” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What does a quick glance of this text 5. Who is the narrator?
explain to readers?
A Mom 1. Y N
A The text is very descriptive. B Dad
B The text is too challenging. C Sara’s brother
C The text is long. D Sara
2. Y N
D The text is a letter.
6. What inference can be made 3. Y N

2. What does Sara’s use of exclamation about how Sara feels about
marks tell readers? Space Academy?
A She is happy and writing A She is afraid of it. 4. Y N

with excitement. B She loves it.
B She is confused. C She dislikes it.
C She does not know how to feel. D She has never been to it.
5. Y N
D She is still nervous.
7. Which best summarizes 6. Y N

3. What do you predict Sara will do Sara’s letter?
when she gets home?
A It is all about her first day at
A She will tell her friends what a good Space Academy. 7. Y N
time she had. B It is about the bus ride to
B She will warn her friends not to go to Space Academy.
Space Academy. C 8. Y N
It tells about the exciting activities
C She will be angry with her mom and equipment at Space Academy.
and dad. D It describes what she wants to do
D She will go to Space Academy for the when she gets home.
first time. ___ / 8
8. How do Sara’s feelings about Total
4. What makes Sara feel less anxious camp change?
about Space Academy?
A from sad to angry
A She is having a good time. B from happy to nervous
B She is lonely. C from nervous to happy
C Her mom and dad visit her. and enthusiastic
D She is sick. D from anxious to scared

WEEK 22
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Sara Blasts Off.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Imagine you are at Space Academy. What do you think a day there would be like?
Describe your day.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 23
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Today, we take airplane travel for granted, but that wasn’t always the case. For thousands
of years, people wanted to fly and were interested in flight. The ancient Greeks, for instance,
had several myths about people who could fly. In real life, though, their experiments with
1. Y N
flight failed. In the late 1400s, Leonardo da Vinci designed a machine that could help
people fly. The machine was never created, but da Vinci’s design was the inspiration for
today’s helicopter. Da Vinci was fascinated by flight, though. He drew over 100 pictures 2. Y N
of his theories about flying. In 1783, the first hot air balloon took flight in France. Its first
passengers were a sheep, a rooster, and a duck!
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which word from the text is used as
a verb?
A the history of flight 4. Y N
B Leonardo da Vinci
A drew
C the ancient Greeks

B hot
C thousands 5. Y N
D hot air balloons
D late
2. Which feature would help readers

best understand this topic? 5. What does the phrase take airplane ___ / 5
travel for granted mean?
A a picture of da Vinci’s design next to Total
a hot air balloon A to be afraid to travel by airplane
B a time line showing how airplanes B to go somewhere by airplane
have changed in the 1900s C to be fascinated by airplanes
C a photograph of a sheep, a rooster, D not think airplane travel is special
and a duck
D a graph showing how much today’s
planes cost
3. Which word is a synonym for myths?
A theories
B inventors
C history
D legends

WEEK 23
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Over the centuries, inventors had tried to find a way for people to fly. But they weren’t
successful until 1903. That was the year that brothers Wilbur and Orville Wright flew the first
1. Y N
airplane. For years, the Wright brothers had been interested in flight. They tried to learn
all they could about it. In 1902, they built a glider, which is a machine that flew without an
engine. The glider used wind to power its flight. But the Wright brothers wanted a machine
2. Y N
that could fly even without wind. So they created a glider with a small engine. They called it
their flying machine. On December 14, 1903, Orville Wright flew the first gasoline-powered
airplane at Kitty Hawk, North Carolina. The age of the airplane had begun!
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which part of speech is the word fly
in the first sentence?
4. Y N A Kitty Hawk, North Carolina
B the Wright brothers’ childhood
A a noun
C the invention of the airplane

B a verb
5. Y N C an adverb
D how to make your own airplane
D a noun and a verb
2. According to the sequence of events

___ / 5 in this text, what did the Wright 5. What is the tone of the text?
brothers do before they built a glider
Total with an engine? A informative
A flew the first gasoline-powered

B silly
airplane C persuasive
B learned all they could about flight D manipulative
C created a glider with a
gasoline-powered engine
D went to Kitty Hawk, North Carolina
3. What is the meaning of the word age

in this text?
A to get older
B how old a person is
C years
D era

WEEK 23
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
The first airplanes were very fragile. They were made of light material such as bamboo,
and their wings were made of fabric. That was so that they would be able to fly more easily.
1. Y N
But those light materials were also easily broken and torn. There was another problem,
too. An engine powerful enough to keep a plane flying was often too large and heavy for
the plane’s structure. An engine that was light enough and small enough for a plane was
also not very powerful. But the people who developed and flew those planes kept working 2. Y N
at it. Eventually, airplane design improved. Planes were slimmer and made better use of
air currents. Motors got both smaller and more efficient. The people who designed and flew
these first planes were called “birdmen.” Their hard work led to the airplanes we know today.
3. Y N
1. Why were the first airplanes made of 3. Which word is a synonym for fabric?
4. Y N
light materials?
A fragile
A so they would fit together better B motor
B so they would be able to fly C engine
5. Y N
more easily
C so they would be less expensive
D cloth
D so they would be easier to make

4. Which adjective describes something ___ / 5
that is easily torn or broken?
2. Which is an example of a Total
cause-and-effect relationship? A efficient
A The first people to fly planes were

B powerful
called “birdmen.” C fragile
B Because airplanes were made of D slim
light materials, they easily broke
and tore.
C People worked hard at the 5. Who were birdmen?
airplane design.
A men who hunted birds
D Early planes were fragile.
B people who enjoyed watching birds
C men who dressed up as birds
D the people who worked on and flew
the first airplanes

WEEK 23
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Barnstorming
In the early days of airplanes, a lot of people didn’t think it was really possible for humans to
fly. So at that time, airplanes were a novelty. They were something interesting that people hadn’t
seen before. Early pilots sometimes put on air shows for the public so people could see what
airplanes were capable of doing. Those pilots were called barnstormers. Some barnstormers
took people on plane rides. That was a very exciting and sometimes dangerous thing to do!
Those barnstormers would borrow a farmer’s field and offer rides. People would pay the pilot
and take a plane ride.
Other barnstormers did stunts, or tricks, in the air. For example, some barnstormers flew
upside down, and others flew their planes in a zigzag pattern. Sometimes, barnstormers flew in
pairs. One person would fly the plane, and the other would walk on the plane’s wing or do some
other stunt. People loved to see these air shows—the fancier or more dangerous the stunts, the
better they liked it.
Some barnstormers grew quite rich. They traveled around to different air shows. They were
paid for their performances. But most barnstormers did not fly in order to get rich. They flew
because they loved flying. Sometimes, they flew because they liked the danger. And flying was
dangerous at that time. Many barnstormers got into accidents or crashed their planes. Several
of them died.
After the 1920s, planes became much safer. They began to be used for regular travel. And
people became more familiar with them. So by the late 1930s, barnstorming wasn’t as popular
anymore. But the barnstormers are still remembered as daring pilots.
barnstormers

WEEK 23
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Barnstorming,” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What could a reader do to 5. According to the text, when did
understand the word novelty? planes become much safer?
1. Y N
A say the word aloud A after the 1930s
B read the title and look at the picture B after the 1920s
C reread the paragraph where you see C before the 1920s 2. Y N
the word D they are not safe even today
D read the last sentence
3. Y N
6. Why do you think barnstormers did
2. Which question is not answered in not do shows in the middle of a city?
the text?
A They were afraid of being 4. Y N
A What is a barnstormer? in airplanes.
B When did barnstorming stop B They did not want to do tricks in
being popular? the air. 5. Y N
C How many barnstormers were there? C They did not know where cities were.
D What did barnstormers do? D They did not have room to take off
and land. 6. Y N
3. How does the author likely feel

about barnstormers? 7. Which is an accurate description
of barnstormers? 7. Y N
A interested
B bored
A elderly
C angry
B clumsy 8. Y N
D confused
C timid
D brave
4. What is the author’s purpose?

___ / 8
8. Why did barnstormers
A to persuade readers to stop performing? Total
become barnstormers
B to inform readers about barnstorming
A Airplanes became safer, more
familiar objects to the audiences.
C to entertain readers with a B Barnstormers became scared to fly.
fictional story
D to make readers afraid to fly
C It was made to be against the law.
D People became too nervous to watch
the daring acts.

WEEK 23
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Barnstorming.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
What do you think it would be like to be a barnstormer? Would you want to be one?
Why or why not? Write about what you think it would be like, and explain why you
would or would not like the job.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 24
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Zach had liked soccer for a long time. In fact, he had been playing since he was six years
old. But until now, he had only played in a neighborhood soccer league. That changed one
1. Y N
day when he heard the morning announcements at school. The principal announced that
the school would be starting a soccer team! Zach was so excited about it that he almost
didn’t listen closely to the details. But he did hear the most important information. There
would be a meeting on Wednesday for everyone who was interested in being on the soccer 2. Y N
team. Zach didn’t want to miss out on that meeting, so he wrote down the time. He would
have to talk to his parents about it, but he was sure they would let him join the team. After
all, they hadn’t had a problem letting him play in the neighborhood league.
3. Y N
1. Why is Zach excited? 3. Which prefix could you add to

4. Y N
interested to make an antonym for it?
A His school is starting a
baseball team. A uni–
B He got a very good grade on a test. B chrom– 5. Y N
C His school is starting a soccer team. C sub–

D He just won a big prize. D un–
___ / 5
2. What makes Zach think his parents 4. Which word in the text is used as an
Total
will let him join the team? adjective to describe a league?
A They let him play in the A soccer

neighborhood team. B team
B He already asked them if he C Zach
could join.
C Both his parents play soccer.
D played
D The principal asked them if he could

join the team. 5. What does the phrase to miss out
on mean?
A to leave out
B to feel lonely for
C to attend
D to lose a chance for

WEEK 24
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Zach’s school was starting a soccer team, and he wanted to join it. Zach already played
for a neighborhood soccer league. So when he asked his parents about trying out for the
1. Y N
school team, they were concerned. They thought he might be so busy with soccer that he
wouldn’t have time for his schoolwork. But Zach explained that he would rather play for the
school team. If he made that team, he would stop playing in the neighborhood league. The
neighborhood league was for younger kids anyway, and Zach was getting too old for it. So
2. Y N
his mom and dad said that he could try out for the school team. On tryout day, Zach got to
the field early to practice—and so did a lot of other kids. But Zach was a good player, so
when it was his turn to try out, the coach chose Zach immediately.
3. Y N
1. Where does the end of this story 3. What does the word already tell you
4. Y N take place? about what Zach was doing?
A at home A He wants to keep playing in the

B neighborhood league.
on a soccer field
5. Y N
B
C He does not want to play soccer.
at a swimming pool
D in a forest
C He is not playing in the
neighborhood league.
D He was playing in the neighborhood
___ / 5 2. Why does Zach want to play for league before the story starts.
Total the school team and not the
neighborhood league?
A 4. What does the adverb immediately

Zach is getting too old for the indicate to readers?
B Zach is too young for the
A The coach chose Zach after a
long time.
C Zach was not picked for the
B The coach chose Zach very quickly.
neighborhood team. C The coach chose Zach reluctantly.
D The neighborhood league has ended. D The coach chose Zach last.
5. Which word or phrase holds the

same meaning as the word rather?
A object to
B never
C prefer to
D sometimes

WEEK 24
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Zach played on his school’s new soccer team, and he really enjoyed it. Practices
were difficult, but he was learning a lot. Soon, the school’s team started playing some
other teams. At first, Zach’s school didn’t win very many games, and losing was very 1. Y N
disappointing. But the coach told the team not to give up. He explained that every
new team loses games while everyone learns to work together. He promised the team
members that if they worked hard and helped one another, the team would begin to win,
and after a few more games, it started to happen. Zach’s team won the first one, and then 2. Y N
another game, and it wasn’t long until they started winning most of their games. Zach
couldn’t have been happier! Then came very good news: The team was going to play in
this year’s soccer tournament!
3. Y N
1. What good news does the team get? 3. Which word has the same meaning
4. Y N
as give up?
A There are some new people on
the team. A begin
B Zach will play more often. B quit 5. Y N
C The team will play in this year’s C complain

soccer tournament. D prevail
D The team is getting new equipment.
___ / 5
4. Which noun describes a series
Total
2. Why does Zach’s team start to of games?
win games?
A tournament
A The team has new uniforms and new B coach
soccer balls.
B Zach is the best player on the team.
C team
C The other teams do not play

D game
very well.
D The team members work hard and 5. Which word or phrase is an antonym
help one another. of disappointing?
A infuriating
B saddening
C pleasing
D confusing

WEEK 24
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Goal!
Zach’s school now had a soccer team, and he was excited to be a part of it. The team
practiced regularly, and everyone worked hard. The team members tried to help one another,
and their hard work paid off with good results. Little by little, the team began to win their games.
Then, they were invited to play in a soccer tournament. Zach wanted his team to win the
tournament, and he was determined to do his best to see that they would.
On the day the tournament began, Zach and his team got to the soccer field early. They
wanted to practice as much as they could before the tournament started. The coach told them
to do their best and play as well as they could. He said that it wouldn’t be easy because the
other teams were very good. But he explained that even if the team didn’t win the tournament,
they should be proud they were there. Then, the first games began. Zach and the team played
against some very good teams that day, and they almost lost a few times. But everybody kept
working hard, and they managed to win. The more games they won, the harder the games got.
The final games in the tournament were held the next day. Zach and his team still had a
chance to win the tournament, so they all played the best they could, and they beat several
teams. Then, came the final game. This time, they were up against the best soccer team in
the tournament. Zach and his team gave the game their best effort, but the other team won.
Everyone was upset about losing, but the coach told them they’d done a fantastic job. He said
he thought they’d done very well in the tournament considering they were a new team. That
didn’t make Zach any happier, but he knew the coach was right. And he knew that he and his
team would be back next year.

WEEK 24
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Goal!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Where would a reader find a text 5. From what point of view is this
like this? text told?
1. Y N
A in a science textbook A third person
B in a recipe book B first person
C in a book of short stories C second person 2. Y N
D in a fishing magazine D there is no point of view
3.
2. What would readers who enjoy this 6. What does the author’s word
Y N
text also like to read about? choice tell readers about Zach and
his team?
A sports
A They are lazy. 4. Y N
B history
C television
B They are studious.
D science
C They are athletic.
5. Y N
D They are clumsy.
3. What might have happened if Zach

and his team had not practiced and
worked hard?
7. Why do you think the games get 6. Y N
harder as the tournament goes on?
A They would have won A Everyone gets too tired to play.
the tournament. 7. Y N
B B Only the best teams move on in
They would not have been in the tournament.
the tournament.
C C Everyone is bored with soccer.
They would have been much better 8. Y N
at soccer. D The very best teams leave the
tournament early.
D The coach would have been very
proud of them.
8. Why should Zach and his team be
___ / 8
proud of themselves, even though
4. Which statement is likely true about
they did not win? Total
Zach and his team?
A They will never play soccer again.
A They worked hard and improved a lot
over the course of the season.
B They will work very hard and try to
B
win the tournament next year. They do not play very well.
C They will celebrate winning the

C They have new uniforms.
soccer tournament. D The other team was rude and did not
D They will go to a soccer show good sportsmanship.
tournament tomorrow.
WEEK 24
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Goal!” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Have you ever lost at something? What happened? What was it like? What did
you do about it? Write about what happened, or how you will respond to a loss in
the future.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 25
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Have you ever wanted to get a desk, a table, or a chair for your room? Maybe you’ve
wanted to put shelves up. Making changes to your room can cost a lot of money if you 1. Y N
go to a store and buy new furniture. But you don’t have to do that. You can make some
amazing changes in your room without spending a lot of money at all. Sometimes, people
sell furniture they no longer want. They often do this when they are moving or when they are
buying new things. You can frequently find that furniture at yard sales or garage sales. Flea 2. Y N
markets are also good places to look for used desks, tables, or chairs. You can also go to
swap meets, where people bring things that they want to sell and look for things they want to
buy. If you know where to look, you can find some very nice things that aren’t expensive.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which is not a good place to look for
4. Y N
used furniture?
A how to find inexpensive furniture
B how to make a new desk
A a swap meet
C how to hold a yard sale

B a garage sale 5. Y N
D where to find a good garage sale

C a yard sale
D a department store
2. Why might an author start a piece of ___ / 5

text with a question? 5. What is frequently find an
Total
example of?
A to hook the reader
B to explain what the author does
A a simile
not know B synonyms
C to share opinions C alliteration
D to state the main idea D personification
A frequently and find

B often and frequently
C often and rarely
D costly and inexpensive

WEEK 25
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
What if you find the perfect desk, table, or chair, but you dislike the color? You can paint
your new furniture exactly the color you want. To do that, though, you need to choose the
1. Y N
kind of paint that will work best for your furniture. Different kinds of paint work best for
different kinds of material, so the first step to painting is selecting the right kind of paint. If
you have a metal desk, chair, or table, you may want latex paint. Latex paint has a water
2. Y N base. One of its ingredients is latex, a kind of rubber. You can also use enamel paint on
metal. Enamel paint has an oil base. Enamel paint looks glossy when it dries. You can also
use enamel paint to paint wooden furniture. You can also use wood stain, which is a kind of
dye, on wooden furniture.
3. Y N
1. Which of these is true about 4. Which word is used as an adjective

4. Y N painting furniture? to describe paint that has a water
base and a kind of rubber as
A Different kinds of paint work best for an ingredient?
different materials.
5. Y N A enamel
B Latex paint is never a good choice
for furniture. B latex
C It doesn’t matter which paint you use C stain
on your furniture. D
___ / 5 oil
D Furniture cannot be painted.
Total
2. Which of these is a good title for
this text? A informational
A Finding the Right Paint Store

B silly
B How Latex Paint is Made

C persuasive
C You Can Paint Your Furniture

D serious
D The Story of Wood Stain
3. Which word is a synonym for glossy?
A dull
B green
C sticky
D shiny

WEEK 25
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Suppose you’ve found exactly the desk, table, or chair you want. You’ve decided to
paint it, and you’ve found exactly the color you want. Before you paint, you’ll need to
prepare your furniture. That way, your desk, table, or chair will look its best when you’re
1. Y N
finished. The way you prepare furniture depends on its material. For example, if your
furniture is made of wood, you will want to make sure the wood is very smooth before you
apply any paint. You will also want to get rid of old, flaky paint that may be there. If you
2. Y N
are using wood stain, you will want to use sandpaper to smooth the wood first. If your
furniture is made of metal, it may be rusty. You’ll want to remove the rust before you paint
it. A wire brush will scrape away the rust, and then you can wash the piece of furniture to
remove dirt. 3. Y N
1. What does this text tell readers? 4. What word or phrase has the same 4. Y N
meaning as the verb remove?
A where to find metal furniture
B how to prepare furniture for painting
A apply
5. Y N
C why you need to paint furniture
B put on
D the history of furniture

C wash
D take away
___ / 5
2. According to the text, which object
helps a person to prepare wooden 5. What is the meaning of the word Total
furniture for painting? apply in this text?
A a wire brush A put on

B rust B relate
C sandpaper C ask for
D wood D refer
3. Which two words are antonyms?
A ready and prepared

B remove and apply
C flaky and rusty
D smooth and stain

WEEK 25
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Do it Yourself
Have you ever wanted to change the look of your room? Maybe you have wanted a new
table, chair, or desk. Brand new furniture can be very expensive, though, so many kids don’t
think they can easily get new things. But you really don’t have to spend a lot of money on
furniture. You can find a terrific desk, table or chair that doesn’t cost much and turn it into the
perfect piece of furniture for your room.
Start by going to yard sales, garage sales, flea markets, and swap meets. All of those are
good places to find furniture. If you don’t find what you want at first, keep looking. Chances are
you’ll find exactly the kind of desk, chair, or table you want for your room. And you won’t pay
nearly as much for it as you would in a department store.
Once you find the furniture you want, it’s time to make it your own. Choose the kind of paint
that will work best for the furniture you’ve bought. Most stores offer latex and enamel paints in
many colors. Choose a color that will match the rest of what you have in your room, and then
get enough paint in that color to do the job. You will also want to get supplies to prepare your
furniture for painting.
If your table, desk, or chair is wooden, you may choose to use wood stain. If you do, you’ll
want to smooth it with sandpaper first. If you will be painting it, you don’t need sandpaper unless
there are cuts or splinters in the wood. If your furniture is made of metal, you’ll want a wire brush
to get rid of rust and prepare it for painting.
Before you start painting or staining, be sure

you’re wearing old clothing. If you will be using
wood stain, apply the stain carefully, and then let
it dry. If you use paint, you may want to start with
primer, which is an undercoat for paint. Primer
covers up old paint. It also helps the new paint
adhere, or stick to the furniture. After the primer
is dry, paint your furniture. Now you’ve got an
amazing new look for your room!

WEEK 25
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Do It Yourself” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is the first step in finding great 5. What might people who are
new furniture for your room? interested in this topic also like?
1. Y N
A Use primer to cover up old paint. A doing home projects
B Check out flea markets, thrift shops, B playing football
and swap meets. C reading a lot 2. Y N
C Choose a paint color that will match D watching movies on TV
your room.
D Make sure you are wearing old 3. Y N
clothing. 6. Why should you wear old clothes if
you are painting or staining?
2. If a reader doesn’t remember what A so you can easily find your 4. Y N

primer is used for, what would likely old clothes
help? B so you will be able to wear your
A new clothes
Read the word aloud. 5. Y N
B Read the title again.
C so you will not stain clothes you like
C Read the paragraph again.

D so you can make room in your closet
D 6. Y N
Read the first sentence again.
7. What are the facts in this text about?
3. What is the author’s purpose? A buying furniture

7. Y N
A to tell a personal story
B making clothes
B to tell how to change the look of a

C taking photographs
room without spending much money D painting furniture 8. Y N
C to get readers to go to a
furniture store
D 8. Why might kids think they can’t get
to show how to stay safe in new furniture for their rooms?
an emergency ___ / 8
A New furniture is extremely hard
to find. Total
4. What is a reason for reading B Kids do not like to use furniture.
this text?
C Most parents do not want kids to
A to find out how to paint furniture have rooms.
B to find a good furniture store D Brand new furniture can be
C to learn how to paint portraits expensive.
D to learn the history of

furniture-making
WEEK 25
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Do It Yourself.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
What kind of furniture would you want for your room? Write about what you would do
to find what you want, get it ready, and paint or stain it.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 26
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Crystal was a reporter for her school’s newspaper, The Real Story. She liked interviewing
people. She also liked getting new ideas for stories and special features. She enjoyed it so 1. Y N
much that she wanted a career in news reporting. Every week, the kids who worked on the
newspaper met with their advisor, Mr. Thorne. They put together the news stories for that
week’s edition of the paper. Then, they planned the next week’s edition. During the week,
the reporters would get their stories and write them up. Then, they would bring their stories 2. Y N
to the next week’s meeting. Crystal especially liked it when the newspaper was ready for
publishing and she could see how her stories and interviews fit in with everyone else’s work.
3. Y N
1. What does Crystal enjoy the most? 4. Which prefix could you add to make
an antonym for the verb liked? 4. Y N
A playing on her school’s
basketball team A bi–
B writing news stories and interviews B sub– 5. Y N
C playing video games C mega–
D going to the movies D dis–
___ / 5
2. Which event does not happen at the 5. What is the meaning of feature in
newspaper meetings? this text? Total
A planning the next week’s paper A part

B putting together the stories for that B element
week’s paper C trait
C writing up stories D story
D sharing stories with other reporters
3. What word means a version of

a newspaper?
A edition
B advisor
C interview
D idea

WEEK 26
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Crystal really enjoyed working on The Real Story, her school’s newspaper, but one day
she got a story assignment she was convinced she would hate. The newspaper’s advisor,
1. Y N
Mr. Thorne, asked her to interview the school nurse, Mrs. Curtis. Crystal was positive that an
interview with the nurse would be a really boring story. Who wanted to read a feature about
going to the nurse’s office for hearing and vision testing and to take medicine? But
2. Y N Mr. Thorne insisted that Crystal do the interview. He reminded her that everyone has a
story to tell. “You never know what you might learn,” he told her. So, very reluctantly, Crystal
agreed to do the story. She contacted Mrs. Curtis and asked if she could interview her for
the school paper. Mrs. Curtis agreed willingly, and the two set up an appointment.
3. Y N
1. Why doesn’t Crystal want to interview 4. What does the verb insisted tell
4. Y N the nurse? readers about Mr. Thorne?
A She thinks the story will be boring. A He does not know Crystal will do
B the interview.
5. Y N She does not like Mrs. Curtis.
C She does not know how to do
B He wants to do the interview.
an interview. C He feels strongly about Crystal doing
D the interview.
She thinks the story will be too hard.
___ / 5
D He does not care if Crystal does
the interview.
Total 2. How does Mrs. Curtis feel about
doing the interview?
5. Which two words are antonyms?
A She is angry about it.
B She is nervous about it.
A reluctantly and willingly
C She does not want to do it.

B insisted and agreed
D She is happy about it.

C newspaper and advisor
D feature and interview
A positive and unsure

B convinced and certain
C boring and convinced
D really and willingly

WEEK 26
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Crystal had been assigned to interview the school nurse, Mrs. Curtis, for her school’s
newspaper. Although she wasn’t enthusiastic about the idea, Crystal kept the appointment
for the interview. After the two greeted each other, Crystal thanked Mrs. Curtis for being 1. Y N
willing to do the interview. Mrs. Curtis responded, “Oh, it’s no problem at all. I remember
doing some stories for the newspaper years ago when I was a student here.”
That got Crystal’s interest immediately, and she asked in surprise, “You were a 2. Y N
student here?”
“Sure was,” Mrs. Curtis answered proudly. “In fact,” she lowered her voice and continued,
“did you ever hear about the secret basement here at the school?” 3. Y N
Now, Crystal was really interested. Who knew what might be stashed in a secret
basement? This was going to be a real story!
4. Y N
1. Where does this text take place? 4. What part of speech is the
5. Y N
word greeted?
A the supermarket
B the mall
A verb
C Crystal’s home
B noun
C ___ / 5
D adverb
the nurse’s office
D adjective
Total
2. What does Mrs. Curtis tell Crystal?

5. What is the tone of the story?
A The school has a secret basement.
B The school is 300 years old.
A informative
C The school is about to be closed.

B silly
D The school is about to get a new set

C engaging
of computers. D serious

for enthusiastic?
A willing
B proud
C reluctant
D secret

WEEK 26
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Crystal Gets the Scoop

Crystal was a reporter for her school’s newspaper, The Real Story. She’d done several
different kinds of stories before, but never anything like the story she was about to do. During an
interview, the school nurse, Mrs. Curtis, had told Crystal that the school had a secret basement.
Crystal couldn’t resist the opportunity to find out what was in the basement. It could be just
about anything! So on the day she turned in her interview with Mrs. Curtis, Crystal asked the
newspaper’s advisor, Mr. Thorne, if she could do a feature on the school’s basement. He agreed
with her that the basement might be a fascinating story, especially since a lot of people weren’t
even aware that it existed.
Crystal got permission from the principal to go down into the basement as long as some
teachers went with her. So Mr. Thorne and Mrs. Curtis accompanied Crystal when she went
to explore the basement. The janitor unlocked the basement door, and Crystal and the two
teachers slowly descended the narrow staircase. When they reached the bottom of the stairs,
Mrs. Curtis turned on the light, and she, Mr. Thorne, and Crystal began to look around.
Crystal soon discovered a large set of bookshelves with a collection of old dusty books on
them. “What are those?” she wondered aloud. Neither of the two teachers knew, so Crystal
made her way over to look more closely at the books. They turned out to be yearbooks from
every year since the school opened. For almost an hour, Crystal, Mr. Thorne, and Mrs. Curtis
paged slowly through the yearbooks. They joked about the old-fashioned clothes and hair in
the oldest books, and they commented on some of the people they recognized. All of a sudden,
Crystal knew the next feature she wanted to write. These books were the school’s story just
waiting to be told.

WEEK 26
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Crystal Gets the Scoop” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which prediction based on the title of 5. Why do Mr. Thorne and Mrs. Curtis
the text is most accurate? go to the basement with Crystal?
1. Y N
A This text is about ice cream. A They want to stop Crystal from going.
B This text is about picking B They are afraid to go alone.
something up. C 2. Y N
Crystal is too afraid to go by herself.
C This text is about a famous journalist. D The principal says that some
D This text is about a reporter getting teachers must go to the basement
a story. with Crystal. 3. Y N
2. What do context clues indicate 6. What can you infer about

about the relevant meaning of the the basement? 4. Y N
word descended?
A It is not used very often.
A went down B Everyone goes there. 5. Y N
B sloped C It is the largest room in the building.
C was related to D Many groups hold meetings there.
D arrived suddenly 6. Y N
7. How does Crystal feel about

3. Which statement is likely true about her experience?
the yearbooks? 7. Y N
A happy and inspired
A They are sold in bookstores. B upset and nervous
B They are very popular. C afraid 8. Y N
C They are brand-new. D jealous and unhappy
D They have been there for a long time.
8. Why does Crystal want her next story

___ / 8
4. Which word describes Crystal? to be about the old yearbooks?
Total
A timid A She wants to tell the school about
B old friends.
curious
C disrespectful
B Mr. Thorne wants her to write about
the yearbooks.
D athletic C She believes the old yearbooks have
stories that should be told.
D She is tired of the stories she
usually writes.
WEEK 26
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Crystal Gets the Scoop.” Then, read the prompt and respond
SCORE
___ / 4
What story would you want to write about your school? Explain the story you would
write about.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 27
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
You probably write all the time without even thinking about it. Writing is a very important
part of daily life. It serves several important purposes. One purpose of writing is to
communicate. In fact, before there were telephones, writing was just about the only way 1. Y N
people could stay in contact. That was especially true if they did not live in the same town.
Writing also helps us to remember things and keep records. That’s one reason you take
notes in class. It’s also why people make shopping lists and write down telephone numbers.
2. Y N
Imagine what it would be like if your teacher did not keep records of your assignments and
exam scores. It would be difficult to recall what work you had completed. It would also be
hard to know how you were doing in class.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. What part of speech is the

word true? 4. Y N
A why people make shopping lists
B why people write
A noun
C what life was like before telephones

B adverb 5. Y N
D how to get a better exam score

C adjective
D verb
2. Which is not a reason people write?

___ / 5
5. What is the meaning of the word
A to keep records record in this text? Total
B to remember things A a musical release
C to communicate B a top performance
D to follow rules C an exam
D written proof
3. Which word is a synonym for recall?
A remember
B write
C discuss
D complete

WEEK 27
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
The alphabet you use is a very important tool for writing, but it is not the only one. There
are many kinds of alphabets. Children in Japan learn to write with kanji (KAHN-gee). Kanji
1. Y N
are small drawings, or characters. They do not represent letters, the way the alphabet you
know does. Instead, they represent a whole meaning. For instance, there is a kanji for water
and one for big. Russian children learn another kind of alphabet called the Cyrillic
(si-RIL-ik) alphabet. Some Cyrillic letters, such as O and T, sound like the letters you know.
2. Y N
But there are many Cyrillic letters that sound different from the letters you know. Hebrew and
Arabic also use alphabets that are different from the one you know. So does Hindi. Hindi is
a language spoken in India.
3. Y N
1. Which of these is the topic sentence 3. Which word is defined as drawings,

4. Y N for this text? or characters, that represent whole
meanings?
A There are many kinds of alphabets.
B Hindi is a language spoken in India.
A Cyrillic letters
5. Y N
C They do not represent letters, the way
B kanji
the alphabet you know does. C alphabets
D Children in Japan learn to write with D languages
___ / 5 kanji.
Total 4. Which word from the text can be both

2. Which statement is not true about a noun and a verb?
alphabets?
A writing
A There are many kinds of alphabets. B one
B Kanji represent whole meanings. C letters
C Everyone around the world uses the D learn
same alphabet.
D Some Cyrillic letters sound like the
letters you know. 5. What is the meaning of the word tool
as it is used in the first sentence?
A somebody manipulated by another

B way to get something
C hammer
D instrument

WEEK 27
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
There are several languages that do not have a written alphabet. One example is
American Sign Language. It is a language used by many people who are deaf. This
language uses hand signs and facial expressions. It has an alphabet, but it is not a 1. Y N
written alphabet. Instead, each letter is made with a special hand shape. Many American
Indian languages did not have written languages at first. So people created alphabets for
them. For instance, the Cherokee did not have a written alphabet. So a Cherokee named
2. Y N
Sequoyah (si-KWOI-uh) created one. There are also some other languages that do not have
written alphabets. Ainu is an example. Ainu is a very old language spoken in Japan.
3. Y N
1. Which of these is the main idea of 4. What does the pronoun it in the third
this text? sentence refer to?
4. Y N
A Ainu is a very old language. A Ainu
B American Sign Language is used by B American Sign Language
people with deafness. C 5. Y N
American Indians
C The Cherokee did not used to have a D people
written alphabet.
D Several languages do not have a
written alphabet. 5. What is the meaning of the phrase
___ / 5
for instance?
Total
2. How are American Sign Language A for that matter
letters made?
B for what it’s worth
A with characters C for example
B with a written alphabet D for a start
C with special hand shapes
D with pictures
3. Which is not an example of a

facial expression?
A a slap
B a scowl
C a smile
D a look of surprise

WEEK 27
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Alphabet Soup
Alphabets are very important tools. Without them, we wouldn’t be able to write. How did
alphabets get started in the first place? When and why did people start to write?
The first people were hunter-gatherers who didn’t really need a writing system. They left
behind beautiful paintings, but they didn’t leave anything written. Then, people learned to grow
crops and domesticate animals. Now, people needed some sort of system to record what they
grew and keep track of their animals. They needed a writing system to help them keep records.
The first writing systems developed in two places, Egypt and Mesopotamia, at about the same
time. Both systems used pictograms, which are pictures that represent things. For instance, a
picture of a bull might represent a real bull. For a while, those systems were very successful.
But as cities began to grow, people needed more than a system of pictures. People needed
to be able to represent new ideas. So the Sumerians developed a system of wedge-shaped
marks. That system is called cuneiform (kyoo-NEE-uh-fawrm). At first, those marks represented
things. Later, they represented sounds. A similar thing happened in Egypt. At first, Egyptian
hieroglyphics (hahy-er-uh-GLIF-iks) were pictures of things. Later, they came to represent
sounds, and still later, the symbols for those sounds became letters.
The alphabet you know developed

from those symbols. Even the word
alphabet itself comes from those
ancient symbols. The first letter of the
Hebrew alphabet is alef, which is the
Hebrew word for “ox.” The original
Hebrew letter looks a little like a
symbol for an ox’s head—that is how
that letter got its name. The second
letter of the Hebrew alphabet is bet,
which is also the Hebrew word for
“house.” The Hebrew letter bet looks
a little like a symbol for a house, and
that is how that letter got its name.
cuneiform writing

WEEK 27
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Alphabet Soup” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Why did hunter-gatherers not need 5. What happened as a result
an alphabet? of the Sumerians developing
cuneiform writing? 1. Y N
A They lived in Mesopotamia.
B They lived in large cities.
A Today’s alphabet was developed.
C They didn’t need to keep track

B Hunter-gatherers left 2. Y N
paintings behind.
of things.
D They used hieroglyphics.
C People began to live in cities.
D People used pictograms. 3. Y N
2. If readers forget what cuneiform

means, what can they do? 6. Which topic is the author interested in?
4. Y N
A Write the word. A science
B Read the last sentence again. B language
C Read the title and look at the pictures. C music 5. Y N
D Read the fourth paragraph again. D soccer
6. Y N
3. Which statement reflects an 7. Why did the first writing systems
appropriate purpose for reading this? develop in Egypt and Mesopotamia?
A I want to learn the recipe for A The first humans hunted there. 7. Y N
alphabet soup. B Those places had a lot of animals.
B I want to know the history of C The first cities were located there.
alphabets and how they came to be. 8. Y N
C I want to memorize a new alphabet.
D Those places had very cold climates.
D I want to alphabetize words.

8. What do all the alphabets discussed
in the text have in common?
___ / 8
4. Why did pictograms stop
being successful? A They were all established in the Total
same era.
A Pictograms took too long to write. B They are important tools that allow
B Pictograms were too small. people to write and communicate.
C People were bored with pictograms. C They all share some symbols and
D letters.
People needed to represent
new ideas. D The alphabets in the text do not have
anything in common.

WEEK 27
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Alphabet Soup.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
Imagine you lived in Mesopotamia. What sort of writing would you invent? Create five
or six symbols. Draw the symbols and explain what they mean.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 28
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Tyler enjoyed riding his bike almost more than anything else. Most of all, he liked the
feeling of freedom it gave him. He didn’t have to ask his parents for rides every time he
1. Y N
wanted to go somewhere, and if he wanted to spend time with his friends after school, he
didn’t have to worry about missing the school bus. In fact, Tyler was riding his bike home
from school one day when he got into an accident. He was two blocks from home when
a car came out of a side street without stopping and knocked Tyler and his bicycle to the 2. Y N
ground. The driver immediately stopped and rushed back to see if Tyler was hurt. Tyler was
wearing his helmet, so the accident could have been much worse. But he broke his arm.
There would be no bike riding for Tyler for several weeks to come.
3. Y N
1. How does Tyler break his arm? 3. Which word tells you that the driver
4. Y N
is in a hurry to see if Tyler is hurt?
A Tyler runs his bike into a curb.
B A car comes out of a side street and
A back
knocks Tyler over. B stopped 5. Y N
C A bus pulls out of a parking space C rushed

and knocks Tyler over. D driver
D Tyler tries a trick on his bike and
falls off. ___ / 5
4. What does the adjective side tell
Total
readers about the street?
2. What does Tyler like most about
riding his bike? A a small, less busy street
A the time it saves him

B a major highway
B the fact that his friends want a bike

C the largest street in the area
like his D very famous
C the exercise he gets
D the feeling of freedom it gives him 5. Which expression means the same
thing as most of all?
A more than anything else

B without stopping
C could have been much worse
D worry about

WEEK 28
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Tyler had gotten into an accident while riding his bicycle. He was going to be fine, but
he’d broken his arm, so he wasn’t going to be riding his bicycle any time soon. Tyler was
1. Y N
a careful bike rider. He always wore his helmet—even on summer days when it made his
scalp itch—and he always watched where he was going. That was part of what made him
curious about how the accident had happened. He knew he’d been careful, and the driver
of the car that struck him wasn’t driving recklessly. So one afternoon, Tyler decided to try to
2. Y N
figure out what had happened. He walked to the corner where the accident had occurred.
All of a sudden, he realized the problem: there were no stop signs at that corner. The driver
hadn’t known that Tyler was coming and hadn’t stopped because there was no stop sign.
3. Y N
1. What does Tyler want to know? 3. Which word is an antonym for

4. Y N reckless?
A when he can ride his bike again
B where to get a new bike
A careless
5. Y N C how his bike accident happened

B cautious
D who has a bike that he can borrow

C happy
D curious
___ / 5 2. According to Tyler, what caused

the accident? 4. Which two words are synonyms?
Total
A There is no stop sign at the corner A accident and happened
where the accident happened. B curious and careful
B Tyler was not watching where he C recklessly and carefully
was going.
C The driver of the car was
D happened and occurred
driving recklessly.
D Tyler was not wearing his helmet. 5. What is the meaning of the phrase
figure out?
A request
B hide
C discover
D refuse

WEEK 28
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Tyler had broken his arm in a bicycle accident at a corner near his home. A car had pulled
out of a side street without stopping and knocked Tyler off of his bike. Tyler had discovered
that there was no stop sign at that corner, and that was why the driver hadn’t stopped. Tyler 1. Y N
thought that if there had been a stop sign at the corner, the driver would have stopped and
wouldn’t have hit him. Tyler decided that he was going to do something about it. He was
going to see if there could be a stop sign put up at that corner. That would make it safer for
2. Y N
neighborhood kids to ride their bikes in that area. Tyler talked to his parents about his idea.
He went online for information, too. He found out what he needed to do to get the city to put
up a stop sign, and he got started.
3. Y N
1. What is the problem that Tyler wants 3. Which prefix can be added to safe to
to solve? make its antonym? 4. Y N
A There is no place for cars to park in A sub–

his neighborhood. B un– 5. Y N
B The drivers in his neighborhood drive C hyper–
too fast.
C There are too many stop signs in
D –less
his neighborhood.
___ / 5
D It is not safe enough for kids to ride 4. What part of speech is the word
their bikes in his neighborhood. safer in this text? Total
A noun
2. How does Tyler plan to solve
B verb
the problem?
C adjective
A He will try to get the city to put up a
D
stop sign. pronoun
B He will try to get drivers to stay away

from his street. 5. What does the phrase pulled out of
C mean in this text?
He will stop riding his bike.
D He will stop taking walks near A removed
his home.
B came from
C added to
D quit

WEEK 28
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Stopping For Safety

Tyler had broken his arm in a bicycle accident. The accident happened when a car came out
of a side street without stopping and knocked Tyler down. Tyler figured out that the reason the
car didn’t stop was that there was no stop sign at the corner where the accident happened. So
he decided to try to get the city to put up a stop sign.
First, Tyler’s parents helped him to write a petition to have a stop sign put up. Then, Tyler and
his parents asked everyone they knew to sign the petition. They got their neighbors and friends
to sign and asked those people to talk to other people. Tyler asked everyone at school to sign
and to ask their parents to sign. He asked his teachers to sign the petition, too. Soon, there
were hundreds of names on the petition.
Tyler also got some information about other accidents at the same corner where he’d had his
own accident. If he could show the city that it was a dangerous corner, they might put up a stop
sign there. He hoped that this information and his petition would work.
When the petition was ready, Tyler and his parents went to a meeting of the city council. They
brought along the petition. They also brought the other information. After a long wait, Tyler got
a chance to tell what had happened to him. He told the story of the bicycle accident. Then, he
explained his idea. If there were a stop sign at the corner where the accident happened, other
kids would be safer. After that, Tyler read the petition out loud. Then, he handed it and the other
information to the council. The city council agreed to consider the request and make a decision
before their next meeting.
The next month, there was

another meeting of the city
council. Tyler and his parents
attended this meeting, too.
The head of the city council
announced that the city
had decided to agree to the
petition! There would be a
stop sign on the corner where
Tyler had his accident. Now
other kids would be safer
when they rode their bikes.

WEEK 28
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Stopping for Safety” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. What is the first thing Tyler does to 5. How will the other kids likely feel
get a stop sign at the corner? when the new stop sign is put up?
1. Y N
A He finds out about other accidents. A confused
B He writes a petition for the stop sign. B angry
C He and his parents give the petition C jealous 2. Y N
to the members of the city council. D grateful
D He puts the stop sign on the corner.
3. Y N
6. Which inference makes the
2. Which words signal that this text is most sense?
written in sequential order?
A Tyler’s parents agree with him. 4. Y N
A now and when B Tyler’s mom and dad do not want the
B first and then new stop sign.
C if and they might C Tyler’s parents do not know about 5. Y N
D Tyler’s idea.
after and long wait
D Tyler’s mom and dad think kids
should not ride bikes. 6. Y N
3. What might have happened if Tyler
had not had his accident?
7. What does the information about
A He would have broken his leg, too. other accidents on that corner show? 7. Y N
B He would not live in the A that the corner does not need a
same neighborhood.
stop sign
C He would never learn to ride a bike. 8. Y N
B that it is a dangerous corner
D He would not have noticed the need C that Tyler does not ride his bike safely
for a stop sign.
D that the city needs a new street
___ / 8
4. Which is a reasonable purpose for
reading this text? 8. What does the text tell a reader? Total
A to find out how to get the city to put A Stop signs should be put on
up a stop sign every corner.
B to find out how to stop safely on my B Adults are the only ones who can
bicycle change anything.
C to find out about speed limits C Kids can make a positive change in
D their neighborhoods.
to find out about safety stops for
emergency vehicles D Kids should not ride their bikes.
WEEK 28
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Stopping for Safety.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
What change would you like to see in your town or city? Write about the change you
want and why it is important.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 29
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Hundreds of years ago, people from Europe explored North America. They thought they
had found a new land. They thought nobody else lived in North America. But they were
wrong. Many people already lived in North America. We call those native people American 1. Y N
Indians. Different groups of American Indians lived in different places. Each group had its
own language and its own way of life. Each group was a little different from the other groups.
Today, there are still several groups of American Indians called nations. They live in different
2. Y N
regions of the United States. Each American Indian nation still has its own ways of life and
its own language. Some nations have their own schools, too, where kids learn the language
of their nation.
3. Y N
1. Which of these sentences is a fact? 3. Which word is a synonym for region?

4. Y N
A There are several different American A city
Indian nations. B house
B American Indians do not live in the C area 5. Y N
United States.
C Nobody lived in North America
D country
hundreds of years ago.
D All American Indians speak the 4. What does the adjective
___ / 5
same language. native mean?
Total
A explorer
2. Which title would be a good fit for
B born in a place
this text?
C region
A Facts About American Indians
D a small nation
B Groupings in America
C New Lands
5. Which phrases indicate that this
D Countries text describes both the present
and the past?
A own language and own way of life

B different groups and different places
C hundreds of years ago and today
D some and too

WEEK 29
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
One American Indian nation is called the Navajo Nation. Most Navajo live in the
Southwest. One part of the Navajo reservation is in Arizona and another part is in New
1. Y N
Mexico. There are also parts in Colorado and in Utah. Some Navajo live in cities, and some
live on the reservation. Some Navajo live in houses called hogans. Hogans are usually
round, but they can also be square. The door of a hogan faces east. Navajo believe that
2. Y N a house should face the rising sun. Many Navajo speak their own language. It is a very
different language from English. Some Navajo kids go to Navajo schools. In those schools,
they learn the same things you are learning, but they learn other things, too. They also learn
their own language and they learn Navajo ways of life.
3. Y N
1. According to this text, where do most 4. What part of speech is the

4. Y N Navajo live? word Navajo?
A the Northwest A an adjective

5. Y N B the Southwest B a proper noun
C Florida C a pronoun
D New York City D a verb
___ / 5
2. Which is not a subject that kids learn 5. What does it mean for a door to face
Total in Navajo schools? a certain direction?
A nursing A It points in that direction.

B the Navajo language B It has a face on it.
C math C It is in the front of a structure.
D Navajo ways of life D It is in the back of a structure.
3. Which word is defined as a

Navajo house?
A nation
B reservation
C hogan
D Navajo

WEEK 29
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
The Navajo people call themselves the Diné (dee-NEH). That means “the people” in
Navajo. Nobody knows just when the Navajo came to the Southwest. But they have been
1. Y N
there for hundreds of years. After they arrived, the Navajo learned several skills. They
learned to tend sheep—in fact, they have become expert shepherds. They learned to
weave, too. Many Navajo still practice this traditional skill. The Navajo also became skilled
at riding. They got involved in rodeos, too. Some of today’s Navajo still take part in rodeo 2. Y N
riding, and they are experts at rodeo skills. In 1864, the Navajo were forced to leave their
homes and travel to Fort Sumner, New Mexico. The Navajo call that terrible trip The Long
Walk. They were kept at Fort Sumner for four years. In 1868, the Navajo who were still alive
returned to their homes. 3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which two words are synonyms? 4. Y N
A the Southwest A expert and skilled

B The Long Walk B expert and shepherds 5. Y N
C weaving C rodeo and riding

D the Navajo people D tend and weave
___ / 5
2. What is The Long Walk? 5. What makes a skill traditional?
Total
A the forced move of the Navajo to Fort A It is handed down by ancestors.
Sumner, New Mexico B It is challenging.
B the coming of the Navajo to C It has to do with sheep.
the Southwest
C the way the Navajo learned to
D It is performed at the rodeo.
tend sheep
D the way the Navajo built their homes
3. What is the Navajo word for

the people?
A Fort Sumner
B Navajo
C Diné
D Mexico

WEEK 29
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Code Talkers
Have you ever made up a secret code? Codes let people communicate in a special way. The
only people who can understand messages in code are people who know that code. During
World War II, America needed a special code. Soldiers needed to send messages, but they did
not want the enemy to know what those messages were. So America needed a secret code.
American soldiers would know the code, but enemy soldiers would not. The Navajo people
turned out to be the solution.
The Navajo language is not easy to understand, and not many people speak that language.
So 29 Navajo soldiers used their language to make up a special code using Navajo words.
When the code was ready, they used it and taught it to other soldiers. People who knew the
code could understand messages that were in that code, but people who didn’t know the code
would not know what the messages meant. This group of people who used the code had
a special name: they were called Code Talkers. Code Talkers were able to send important
messages that had to be secret. For example, they could let everyone know when there would
be an attack. They could let others know where the enemy was hiding. That was important
information, and it helped America during the war. In fact, this code remains the only unbroken
code in modern history.
When the war ended, the Code Talkers returned to their homes. They were welcomed home
as heroes. But most people did not know about them because the code was so secret that
nobody could know about it. It wasn’t until the 1960s that anybody knew about the Code Talkers.
Today, we know how important they were. We even know some of the code they used. Here is
an example: The Navajo word for turtle is ch’ééh digháhii (ch-AY da-GAH-hee). A tank looks a
little like a turtle, so when the Code Talkers wanted to send a message about tanks, they said
ch’ééh-digháhii. Now you know some of the code, too!
Navajo Code Talkers

WEEK 29
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Code Talkers” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Why was Navajo a good choice for a 5. What is a reasonable purpose for
code language? reading this?
1. Y N
A It has more words than any
A to read a personal story
other language. B to learn the Navajo language
B It has very few words in it. C to learn about the Code Talkers 2. Y N
C It is one of the most D to learn the story of World War II
popular languages.
D It is hard to learn, and not many 3. Y N
people speak it. 6. What is the author’s likely opinion
about Code Talkers?
2. Why does the author include the

A They were very brave.
4. Y N
pronunciation for ch’ééh digháhii? B They were boring.
A It is just like English.

C They were not important.
B It is a difficult word to pronounce.

D They were not very helpful. 5. Y N
C It is not an important word.

D It is a nonsense word.
7. Why were Code Talkers effective in
6. Y N
the war?
A Very few people knew the code.
3. If you made up a code, what would
B
you have to do? The Code Talkers told everybody they 7. Y N
knew what the code was.
A Tell everybody about it. C The code was very easy to learn.
B Tell people about it only if you wanted D The Code Talkers did not speak 8. Y N
them to know. much Navajo.
C Make a code that everyone could
not understand.
D Make a code that you would
8. Which description of Code Talkers
makes the most sense? ___ / 8
forget easily.
A heroes who helped their countries Total
4. How did the Code Talkers likely feel

B traitors who gave away secrets
about what they did during the war? C people who were difficult
to understand
A jealous
D smart people who could speak
B angry to anyone
C unsure
D proud
WEEK 29
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Code Talkers.” Then, read the prompt and respond on the
SCORE
___ / 4
If you wanted to send a message in code, how would you do it? Make up your own
code and write a word or two in that code. Then, explain how the code works.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 30
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Naomi took a long, critical look at herself in the mirror. This was going to be her first day
at her new school, and she wanted to make the perfect first impression. She finally decided
she was satisfied with her appearance and got her things together for school. She loaded 1. Y N
up her backpack, carried it downstairs, and dropped it by the front door. Then, she went into
the kitchen to get some breakfast. There was her mom, sipping her coffee, wearing those
boring old clothes. Naomi wished her mom wasn’t going to drop her off at school, but she
2. Y N
had insisted on driving Naomi for her first day. Well, at least she wasn’t going to get out of
the car. It was embarrassing enough that she was even going to be there.
3. Y N
1. What is Naomi’s problem? 4. What does the verb sipping tell

the reader?
A She does not have a backpack. 4. Y N
B There is nothing to eat for breakfast.

A Naomi’s mom is not
drinking anything.
C Her mom will not drive her to school. B Naomi’s mom is drinking her 5. Y N
D Her mom insists on driving her coffee quickly.
to school. C Naomi’s mom is drinking her
coffee slowly.
2. Why doesn’t Naomi want her mom to D Naomi’s mom is not at home.
___ / 5
drop her off?
Total
A She is embarrassed. 5. What is the meaning of the word
impression in this story?
B Naomi’s mom does not know the way
to school. A idea
C Naomi is very angry with her mom. B impact or effect
D Naomi’s mom does not want to C dent or mark
drive her.
D imitation
3. Which prefix can be added to the

word satisfied to make its antonym?
A –less
B sub–
C dis–
D hyper–

WEEK 30
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Naomi and her mom slowly pulled up to Naomi’s new school. Naomi looked around her
anxiously and then glanced over at her mom out of the corner of her eye. Why did her mom
1. Y N have to wear that stupid sweater and those jeans? Couldn’t she wear something at least
a little less embarrassing? Naomi hunched down in her seat and muttered, “This is fine,
Mom. Just stop here.” She grabbed her backpack and hurtled out of the car as quickly as
she could, not noticing that a notebook had fallen out of her backpack. She quickly headed
2. Y N
toward the door of the school without looking behind her. She hadn’t even responded to her
mother’s “Hope it goes well!” Nervously, Naomi looked around her. Nobody seemed to have
noticed her getting out of the car. Maybe she’d survive her first day at this school after all.
3. Y N
1. Where does most of this text 4. Which part of speech is the

take place? word slowly?
4. Y N
A in the supermarket A verb
B outside Naomi’s house B noun
5. Y N
C in the car C adverb
D at the library D adjective
___ / 5 2. How does Naomi feel about her mom 5. Which is not an example of
driving her to school? alliteration?
Total
A proud A little less
B embarrassed B stupid sweater
C curious C not noticing
D excited D slowly pulled
3. What tone of voice is used by

someone who mutters?
A excited
B happy
C very loud
D low

WEEK 30
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
It was Naomi’s first day in her new school, and so far, it wasn’t going too terribly. She had
only gotten lost once, and she had gotten out of that situation without having to ask anyone
1. Y N
for help. Then, everything fell apart. Naomi was on her way from math class to lunch when
she heard a familiar voice calling her name. What was her mom doing here? Naomi wanted
more than anything to ignore her mother, but she knew she couldn’t. So she rushed up to
her mother and hissed, “What are you doing here?” 2. Y N
Her mom answered evenly, “I wanted to give you your notebook. You left it in the car.”
Everyone seemed to be staring at Naomi as she silently took the notebook. She wished
the floor would swallow her up. She turned away without saying anything and fled to 3. Y N
the cafeteria.
4. Y N
1. Why is Naomi’s mom at her school? 4. Which verb means the same as the
word fled?
A She wants to talk to Naomi’s teacher.
B She forgot something at the school.
A crawled 5. Y N
C She is lost and needs directions.

B skipped
D She wants to give Naomi

C escaped
her notebook. D slept ___ / 5
Total
2. How does Naomi feel about her mom 5. What is the following sentence an
bringing her notebook? example of: She wished the floor
would swallow her up.
A embarrassed
B grateful
A simile
C excited
B personification
D jealous
C alliteration
D metaphor
3. What does the word hissed tell

readers about Naomi’s tone of voice?
A It is very loud.
B It is happy.
C It is low and angry.
D It is musical.

WEEK 30
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
What Really Matters

Naomi was more embarrassed than she had
ever been before. It was her first day in a new
school, and already her mom had completely
ruined it by coming to the school. Not only had
she come into the school, but she was also
wearing that stupid sweater and those ridiculous
jeans. How could she do that to Naomi? Didn’t
she know that Naomi was nervous enough
about starting in a new school? This was so
unfair! Naomi sat miserably in the cafeteria.
Nobody came near her, and it was easy to see
why: Everyone was probably already laughing
at her.
Just when Naomi thought things couldn’t get

any more humiliating, a girl came up to her and
said, “You’re new here, aren’t you?”
“Yeah,” Naomi murmured, “I am.”
“I didn’t think I recognized you when I saw

you in math class before. I’m Emily, by the way.”
“I’m Naomi,” Naomi responded almost in disbelief. This girl was actually talking to her! After a
moment of stunned silence, Naomi haltingly invited Emily to sit down.
Emily plopped down at the table and then continued, “I saw you in the hall just now, too. Was
that your mom with you?”
Naomi cringed with embarrassment at that question. Of all the things Emily could have
noticed, it had to be that. Unable to say anything, she just nodded.
“You’re so amazingly lucky,” Emily responded. “My mom doesn’t even live with me. I haven’t
talked to her in forever.”
Suddenly everything seemed different to Naomi. Not see your mom every day? Not have
her there when you get home from school? That would be even more horrible than having your
mom embarrass you publicly. “I’m sorry,” she finally said quietly.
For the rest of lunch, the two girls chatted, and by the time lunch was over, they had decided
they liked each other. On her way to her next class, Naomi promised Emily she would have
lunch with her again tomorrow. And she promised herself she would apologize to her mom
later, too.

WEEK 30
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “What Really Matters” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. How does Naomi feel about her new 5. From what point of view is this
school when she first arrives? story told?
1. Y N
A nervous A third person
B happy B first person
C confused C second person 2. Y N
D exhausted D There is no point of view.
3. Y N
2. Why does Emily say that Naomi 6. How does Naomi probably feel when
is lucky? Emily says that she is lucky?
A Naomi’s mom lets her do whatever A She is furious. 4. Y N

she wants. B She is jealous.
B Naomi has a lot of money. C She is surprised.
C Naomi doesn’t live with her mother. D She is exhausted.
5. Y N
D Naomi gets to live with her mom.
7. Why does everything seem different

6.
3. What might happen when Naomi to Naomi when she talks to Emily?
Y N
gets home from school?
A A She learns that Emily did not notice

She will not speak to her mom. her mom. 7. Y N
B She will apologize to her mom. B She realizes that some people don’t
C She will go to school. get to live with their mothers.
D She will beg to stay home C She finds out that Emily won’t speak 8. Y N
from school. to her.
D She finds out that she is going to the
wrong school.
4. What is a reason for reading
this text? ___ / 8
A to find out how to prioritize things 8. Why is Naomi so surprised at what Total
Emily says to her?
B to learn about science topics
C to consider important priorities in life
A She and Emily are having a fight.
D to find out important business ideas

B She is sitting with her mom.
C She thinks Emily will embarrass her
about her mom, but Emily doesn’t.
D She thinks Emily is too shy to talk
to her.
WEEK 30
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “What Really Matters.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
Describe a time when something embarrassing happened to you. How did you deal
with it? Write about how you coped with being embarrassed.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 31
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
No matter where on Earth you live, you have day and night. That happens because of
a movement of Earth called rotation. Earth rotates, or turns, on an imaginary line called
1. Y N
an axis. Imagine a line that starts at the North Pole and goes straight through Earth to the
South Pole. That is Earth’s axis. About every 24 hours, Earth rotates around that axis. To
get an idea of how the Earth rotates, try this. Spin a basketball around, and you will see
that it spins around in a circle. The basketball is rotating around its axis, just as Earth 2. Y N
rotates around its axis. You see daylight when your part of Earth is facing the sun. You see
darkness when Earth has turned so that your part of Earth faces away from the sun.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. What verb is used to describe Earth’s
movement around its axis?
A the North Pole 4. Y N
B what it is like at night

A the South Pole
C how Earth turns on its axis

B an axis
C 5. Y N
D rotation
basketball
D darkness
2. According to the facts in this text,

when do people see daylight? 5. What does the phrase to get an idea ___ / 5
mean in this text?
A when part of Earth is facing the sun Total
B when people see darkness
A to visualize something
C when part of Earth is facing away

B to speak something
from the sun C to try something
D when people see the South Pole D to learn something
3. Which word is a synonym for rotate?
A imaginary
B the North Pole
C axis
D turn

WEEK 31
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Our Earth does not just rotate on its axis. It also revolves, or turns, around the sun.
1. Y N Earth revolves around the sun because of the sun’s gravity. That gravity pulls Earth toward
the sun. But Earth is far away from the sun—it is about 93 million miles away. So Earth’s
revolutions do not happen quickly. Each revolution of Earth around the sun takes about
365 days, or one year. The path that Earth takes around the sun is called its orbit. You
2. Y N might think of that path as a circle, but actually, it isn’t a perfect circle. Earth’s orbit is oval,
much like the shape of an egg. Earth rotates and revolves, but you do not feel that motion
because you rotate and revolve with the planet.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. Which verb means the same
4. Y N as turns?
A how Earth was formed
B how Earth moves around the sun
A revolves
5. Y N C what an axis is
B axis
D where the planets are located

C pulls
D gravity
___ / 5 2. Why do we not feel Earth’s motion?

5. Which word means the force that
Total A because we are not moving pulls Earth toward the sun?
B because Earth does not move A gravity
C because Earth takes many years to B axis
revolve around the sun
D because we are moving at the same
C rotation
speed as Earth D revolution
3. Which word is defined as Earth’s

path around the sun?
A axis
B rotation
C orbit
D gravity

WEEK 31
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Our Earth has seasons because of the tilt of Earth’s axis. Remember that Earth rotates
on its axis, and that is why we have day and night. But that axis does not go straight up
1. Y N
and down; it is slightly tilted. So as Earth revolves around the sun, different parts of Earth
are tilted toward the sun and get more sunlight. For example, in June, July, and August, the
Northern Hemisphere is tilted toward the sun. So people who live there have longer days
and warmer weather—it is summer there. But people in the Southern Hemisphere have 2. Y N
winter at that time. During December, January, and February, the opposite happens—the
Southern Hemisphere is tilted toward the sun. So it gets longer days and warmer weather.
Those are summer months there. But people in the Northern Hemisphere have winter at
that time. 3. Y N
1. According to this text, what 3. What is the definition of tilted? 4. Y N

causes seasons?
A straight
A the Southern Hemisphere B slanted 5. Y N
B Earth’s revolution C tiny
C the Northern Hemisphere D important
D the tilt of Earth’s axis
___ / 5
4. Which of the following words is used
2. What is true about December, as a verb in the text? Total
January, and February?
A sunlight
A It is summer in the Southern B people
Hemisphere.
B It is winter in the Southern
C tilted
Hemisphere. D warmer
C There is more sunlight in the
Northern Hemisphere.
5. What meaning do both revolution
D There is no sunlight at all anywhere and rotation share?
on Earth.
A warms
B grows
C turns
D cools

WEEK 31
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
The Planets Get Moving

Earth is not the only planet in the
solar system that moves. All of the
planets do that. The sun’s gravity
is very strong, so it pulls all of the
planets toward it. That is why all
of the planets revolve around the
sun. And each planet rotates on its
own axis, too. But there are many
differences in the way the planets
rotate and revolve.
Each planet takes a different

amount of time to travel around the
sun. The chart tells you how long it
takes each planet to do that. Look
at the amount of time each planet
the Solar System
needs to go around the sun. Do
you notice any pattern in those times? Here is a hint: Mercury is the closest planet to the sun,
and Neptune is the most distant planet. The closer a planet is to the sun, the less time it takes
to travel around the sun. Each planet also takes a different amount of time to rotate on its axis.
The chart shows you that information.
Here are a few interesting things about the planets. Uranus and Venus are the only two
planets that rotate backward. Every other planet, including Earth, rotates in the other direction.
Also, Uranus does not have a vertical axis the way Earth does. Its axis is horizontal. So it
rotates on its side! Venus has the slowest rotation. A rotation takes longer than a revolution
does. Why don’t Venus and Uranus move the way the other planets do? Many scientists have a
theory about that. They think that a large asteroid might have hit those planets millions of years
ago. A hit like that could change a planet’s rotation. Then, the planet might rotate in the other
direction. It could also make a planet rotate on its side.
Planet Revolution in Earth Time Rotation

Mercury 88 days 59 days
Venus 225 days 243 days
Earth 365 days 24 hours
Mars 687 days 26 hours
Jupiter 12 years 10 hours
Saturn 29 years 10 hours
Uranus 84 years 18 hours
Neptune 164 years 19 hours

WEEK 31
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “The Planets Get Moving” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. The chart shows which planets have 5. What is a reason for reading
the same rotation time? this text?
1. Y N
A Jupiter and Venus A to learn how the planets move
B Earth and Venus B to decide to become a scientist
C Saturn and Mercury C to read a personal story 2. Y N
D Jupiter and Saturn D to learn how asteroids are formed
3. Y N
2. Which of these planets has the 6. Why does Neptune take longer to go
shortest rotation time? around the sun than Earth does?
A Jupiter A It is farther from the sun than Earth. 4. Y N
B Venus B It is much larger than Earth.

C Mercury C It is closer to the sun than Earth.
5. Y N
D Uranus D It is much smaller than Earth.
3. If there were a planet closer to the 7. How are all the planets in the solar 6. Y N
sun than Mercury, it would likely system alike?
A be much bigger than Mercury. A They all revolve around the sun.
7. Y N
B take more time to travel around the B They rotate on a horizontal axis.
sun than Mercury does. C They all rotate at the same speed.
C be the same size as Mercury. D They all have a vertical axis. 8. Y N
D take less time to travel around the
sun than Mercury does.
8. What does it mean for a planet to be
farther from the sun?
4. Why do scientists think Venus and
___ / 8
Uranus move differently than the A It takes a planet longer to travel
other planets do? around the sun. Total
A They are the largest planets in our

B It takes a planet a shorter time to
travel around the sun.
solar system.
B They are both very small planets.
C It takes a planet the same time as
closer planets to travel around
C They may have been hit by the sun.
an asteroid. D The planet is unable to travel around
D They are very close together. the sun.

WEEK 31
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “The Planets Get Moving.” Then, read the prompt and
SCORE
___ / 4
What do you think it would be like if Earth were as far away from the sun as Jupiter is?
What would happen to its revolution? Would its rotation change? Explain your answer.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 32
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
There I was one afternoon, getting ready to play my new video game. I was really excited
about it. I had saved my allowance for a month, and yesterday, I finally had enough money
to buy it. I put the game into the game system, and at first, the game looked as though it 1. Y N
was loading up. All of a sudden, though, everything stopped! I pushed a few buttons, but
the game system stared stubbornly at me, daring me to make it work. I managed to unload
the game itself, but that didn’t help very much. My game system seemed to be completely
2. Y N
dead. I yelled for my big brother, Cody, to come and help me, but he took one look at the
game system and said, “Justin, you’re out of luck. This system is gone. You’ll have to get
another one.”
3. Y N
1. Who is the narrator in this text? 4. In this text, what does the adjective
gone mean? 4. Y N
A Dad
B Cody
A broken
C Justin
B disappeared 5. Y N
D Mom
C difficult
D interesting
2. What is the main problem?

___ / 5
5. What is this phrase an example of:
A Justin cannot get a new game. The game system stared stubbornly Total
at me, daring me to make it work.
B Justin’s game system is broken.
C Cody takes Justin’s game system. A simile
D Justin takes Cody’s game system. B rhyming
C metaphor
3. What does Cody mean when he says D personification
Justin is out of luck?
A Justin cannot use his game system.

B He wishes he had Justin’s
game system.
C He will fix Justin’s game system.
D Justin is lucky to have his
game system.

WEEK 32
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
My game system was completely broken and wouldn’t work at all. I couldn’t remember
exactly when I’d bought it, but I didn’t think it was very long ago, so Dad suggested I try to
1. Y N
get it replaced. He said it might still be under warranty, and if it were, then I could exchange
it for a new game system. I was hoping Dad was right—good game systems are expensive,
and I didn’t want to have to save up my money for months. So I took my system back to the
2. Y N store where I’d bought it. The manager looked up my purchase. He said, “I’m sorry, Justin,
but you actually bought this 14 months ago, and the warranty only lasted for 12 months.
So you won’t be able to get a replacement system unless you purchase a new one.” I was
running out of options fast!
3. Y N
1. What does Justin’s dad suggest? 3. Which word describes a promise

4. Y N that if something breaks, it will
A He suggests that Justin save up his be replaced?
money and buy a new system.
B He suggests that Justin try to
A warranty
5. Y N
exchange his broken game system. B game system
C He suggests that Justin stop playing C replacement
video games. D exchange
___ / 5
D He suggests that Justin look for new
video games to try.
Total 4. Which two words are synonyms and
the same parts of speech?
2. What does Justin find out when he
goes to the store? A replacement, warranty
A He will not be able to shop at that

B warranty, system
store any more. C bought, purchased
B He will be able to get a free D purchase, option
replacement system.
C He will have to buy three new
video games.
D He cannot get a replacement system A informational
unless he buys a new one.
B anxious
C persuasive
D passive

WEEK 32
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
My game system was broken and couldn’t be repaired. I had also found out that the
warranty on it ended, so I couldn’t get it replaced unless I bought a new one. But that was
1. Y N
the problem—I didn’t have the money for a new one. Mom and Dad gave me an allowance
every week, but I would have to save for a few months if I were going to get the kind of
system I wanted. I didn’t want to wait that long, and I knew Mom and Dad wouldn’t just buy
me a new game system—not unless it was my birthday, which it wasn’t. I complained about 2. Y N
it all to my brother Cody—maybe he would have an idea. Cody suggested, “You could get
some kind of job, Justin. That way, you could earn the money for the game system.”
3. Y N
1. What is Justin’s problem? 3. Which word is a synonym

for repaired?
A He doesn’t have the money for a new 4. Y N
game system. A purchased

B Cody took his game system. B replaced
C C 5. Y N
His mom and dad will not let him destroyed
have a game system. D fixed
D He does not want to use his
game system.
4. Which noun has the same meaning ___ / 5
as allowance?
2. What suggestion does Cody make? Total
A meals
A Justin should ask his mom and dad B direction
for a new game system.
B Justin should stop playing
C pocket money
video games. D special permission
C Justin should get a job to earn money
for a game system.
5. What does the word complained
D Justin should ask his friends to let reveal about Justin?
him use their game systems.
A He is excited.
B He is unhappy.
C He is proud.
D He is hopeful.

WEEK 32
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Getting Into the Game

My game system was broken and couldn’t be repaired, and I didn’t have enough money to buy
a new one. The only solution I could think of was to earn some extra money. I tried to come up
with some good ideas for a job—that was what my brother Cody had suggested. One morning, I
was staring out my window wondering what sort of job a kid my age could get, when something
I noticed gave me an inspiration.
My neighbor, Mr. Drummond, was wheeling his garbage barrel out to the curb. Mr. Drummond
was elderly, and I could tell he was struggling to move his garbage barrel. I sprinted downstairs
and outside, dashed across the street, and offered to move Mr. Drummond’s trash to the curb.
He was very grateful. After he thanked me, I decided to discuss my inspiration with him. “I’m
trying to earn some extra money,” I explained, “and I’m just wondering whether people would be
interested in having me do chores.”
“Well, I certainly would, Justin,” Mr.

Drummond answered. “There are several
things that are more difficult for me now that
I’m getting on in years, and it’d be helpful
to have a young person around to do those
jobs. I wouldn’t be surprised if there are
other people my age in the same situation.”
I decided to take Mr. Drummond’s

suggestion about helping elderly people,
and I visited some of my other neighbors.
It turned out that Mr. Drummond was right.
A lot of them were interested in having
someone come around to do chores. I
made up a schedule of people to visit and
chores they wanted me to do, and started
working. At first, it was exhausting, but
before long, I got accustomed to it. Within
a month, I’d earned enough money to
get my new game system, and that made
me very happy. And a lot of people in
the neighborhood were getting the help
they needed. That made me happy, too. I
guess having a broken game system wasn’t
so awful.

WEEK 32
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Getting Into the Game” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Which prediction about the text is 5. Which point of view does this
most relevant? text use?
A 1. Y N
Justin will stop talking to A first person
his neighbors.
B Justin will stop playing video games.
B second person
C Justin will never speak to Mr.

C third person 2. Y N
Drummond again. D There is no point of view.

D Justin will keep doing chores
3. Y N
for people.
6. How do Justin’s parents likely feel
about the solution to his problem?
2. Why does Justin want to
A worried 4. Y N
earn money?
A Mr. Drummond needs help with
B pleased
his trash. C unhappy
5. Y N
B He wants to help people who need D angry
someone to do chores.
C He wants to buy a new bicycle.
7. How does Justin solve the problem 6. Y N
D His game system is broken, and he of his broken game system?
wants to buy a new one.
A He fixes the game system.
7. Y N
3. What do you think Mr. Drummond will
B He asks his parents for the money to
do the next time he needs someone buy a new game system.
to do a chore? C He does chores for people in the
neighborhood to earn money. 8. Y N
A He will hire Justin to do the work.
B He will do the chore himself.
D He decides he doesn’t want a game
system after all.
C He will not know what he should do.
D He will call a friend his age for help.
8. What is the theme of this text?
___ / 8
Total
4. What can be inferred about
A Money is the best reward.
Mr. Drummond’s garbage barrel? B Video games are very fun
and entertaining.
A It is heavy.
B C Hard work and helping others can be
It is very light. very rewarding.
C It is easy to move. D Justin’s parents gave him the money
D It is brand-new. for the new system.

WEEK 32
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Getting Into the Game.” Then, read the prompt and respond
SCORE
___ / 4
If you wanted to earn extra money for something, what would you do to earn it? Write
about what you would want to buy and how you would earn the money.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 33
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
You know where North America is, and you might also know where South America is.
But there is an important place between them that you might not know about. That place is
1. Y N
called Central America. There are seven countries in Central America. In most of them, the
people speak Spanish. That is because long ago, people from Spain explored there. And
for many years, Central America belonged to Spain. But after many years of Spanish rule,
those countries did not want to belong to Spain anymore. They saw that Mexico and the 2. Y N
United States were free. They wanted the same thing for themselves. So in the early 1800s,
those countries declared their independence. Today, each of those seven countries has its
own government.
3. Y N
1. Why do most people in Central 3. Which word is a synonym

America speak Spanish? for independent? 4. Y N
A Many years ago, people from A free

England explored there. B Spanish 5. Y N
B Central America does not have C government
many people.
C Central America is very close
D central
to Spain.
___ / 5
D For many years, Central America 4. What part of the adjective
belonged to Spain. independent could be taken away Total
to make its antonym?
2. Which is a good title for this text? A –endent
A All About Spain

B indep–
B The History of Central America

C in–
C Where to Go in Mexico
D –ent
D Let’s Visit the United States

5. What is the meaning of declare?
A ask
B state
C grow
D run

WEEK 33
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Explorers from Spain were not the first people to live in Central America. Another group
of people was already living there when the Spanish came. They were the Mayans. The
1. Y N
Mayans are a group of American Indians. They have lived in Central America for thousands
of years. For a very long time, they had a strong empire. It stretched from southern Mexico
to northern Colombia. The Mayans were the first American Indians to have their own
written language. They were also very skilled at math. And they were especially skilled
2. Y N
at astronomy. There is no longer a Mayan empire. But you can still see the ruins of many
Mayan buildings, and there are still many Mayan people. They live in several places in
Central America. They have their own language and their own culture.
3. Y N
1. Which statement is not true about 4. What does the noun ruins
4. Y N the Mayans? tell readers?
A There are no more Mayans. A There are no ruins of

B Mayan buildings.
5. Y N They are a group of
American Indians. B People still live in those
C Mayan buildings.
They live in several places in
Central America. C People no longer live in those
D Mayan buildings.
___ / 5 They have their own language
and culture. D Mayan buildings are brand new.
Total
2. Which event happened first? 5. What is the tone of the text?
A The Spanish came to A informative

Central America. B humorous
B You can see ruins of Mayan buildings. C persuasive
C The Mayans created a strong empire. D inspirational
D The Mayan empire disappeared.
3. Which word is a synonym for skilled?
A afraid
B unable
C unknown
D talented

WEEK 33
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Because Central America is close to the equator, it has a tropical climate. Most of
Central America has two seasons, a rainy season and a dry season. The rainy season
1. Y N
usually lasts from May to November. Central America has two coasts. On the east are the
Caribbean Sea and the Atlantic Ocean. On the west is the Pacific Ocean. Some parts are
so narrow that going from coast to coast takes very little time. For example, Panama is one
country in Central America. In some parts of Panama, there are only 30 miles between 2. Y N
coasts! There isn’t much flat land in Central America. Most of the land is hilly, and there
are many mountains. In fact, Central America has several active volcanoes. The weather
is sometimes very hot and humid on the coasts. But in the mountains, it is cooler. Central
America has several rainforests. Many animals and plants live there. 3. Y N
1. Why does Central America have a 4. The adjective tropical describes 4. Y N

tropical climate? which word?
A It is very narrow. A Central America’s climate

5. Y N
B It is very far from the equator. B time
C It is very large. C miles
D It is near the equator. D volcanoes
___ / 5
2. Which statement is true about 5. What is the tone of the text? Total
Central America?
A informative
A It has very few animals or plants. B silly
B It is mostly a large desert. C persuasive
C It is very hilly, and there are D serious
many mountains.
D The weather is very cold most of
the year.

of narrow?
A wide
B watery
C wild
D windy

WEEK 33
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Welcome to Honduras!
Do you enjoy seeing all kinds of different animals? Would you like to visit a place where
you can swim in the sea and hike in the mountains? Then, you would probably enjoy a trip to
Honduras. The country of Honduras is located in the middle of Central America. Many years
ago, it was part of the Mayan empire. Then, it belonged to Spain until 1821. It was even a part
of Mexico for a time. That is why the people of Honduras speak Spanish. But since 1838,
Honduras has been an independent country. Most of the country is mountainous, so the climate
tends to be cooler. But along the Caribbean coast, the land is flat; there, the climate is warm and
humid and the beaches are beautiful.
There are many things to do and see in Honduras. You can visit beautiful Mayan ruins and
see how the people lived thousands of years ago. You can take a hike through a rainforest.
There, you will see hundreds of different kinds of plants and animals. You can even go diving
from a coral reef off the Caribbean coast. You can take a beach vacation, and go swimming and
snorkeling. You can see a professional soccer game, too. Hondurans love soccer, and there are
many teams.
Honduras has several cities. Its capital is Tegucigalpa (tay-goo-see-GAL-pah). That city is in
the mountains. Another very popular city is La Ceiba (la SAY-bah). La Ceiba is on the beach.
It is a very popular vacation place. Every year in May, the people of La Ceiba have a carnival
with parades, dances, and lots of good food. During the carnival, the city also holds a Milk Fair,
which is a lot like a farmer’s market. People from rural areas bring in their animals and crops to
the Milk Fair to show and sell.
No matter what you decide to do in Honduras, you won’t be bored!
Honduras
Central America

WEEK 33
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Welcome to Honduras!” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Who might be interested in reading 5. If Honduras belonged to France
this text? instead of Spain, which language
would people probably speak? 1. Y N
A a person who likes mountain ranges
B a person who wants to travel
A English
to Honduras B Spanish 2. Y N
C a person who likes plants C French
D a person who speaks Spanish D Dutch
3. Y N
2. Knowing where Central America is 6. Why might La Ceiba be popular

located helps the reader understand for vacations?
4. Y N
A where to find Honduras. A It has a very cool, rainy climate.
B what the Milk Fair is. B It has beautiful beaches.
C how to go snorkeling. C It is high up in the mountains. 5. Y N
D how to play soccer. D It is very close to New York City.
6. Y N
3. How does the author likely feel 7. Where is the country of
about Honduras? Honduras located?
A The author does not know about it. A the western part of Central America 7. Y N
B The author dislikes it. B the middle of Central America

C The author is afraid of it. C the eastern part of Central America
8. Y N
D The author likes it. D the southern part of Central America
4. How does the climate of Tegucigalpa 8. What is a word or phrase that

likely compare to the climate of summarizes the author’s opinion
___ / 8
La Ceiba? about Honduras?
Total
A It is much warmer. A small
B It is cooler. B very cold
C It is the same. C fun for visitors
D It is much drier. D remote

WEEK 33
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Welcome to Honduras!” Then, read the prompt and respond
SCORE
___ / 4
Imagine you are going to Honduras. What kind of vacation would you want? Write
about your Honduras vacation.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 34
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Scented candles were one of Heather’s favorite things. She particularly liked
fruit-scented candles like cherry and strawberry. But she liked lots of other scents, too. She
wasn’t allowed to light her candles very often. Her mom and dad were afraid that her little 1. Y N
sister, Sophia, would get too close to them and burn herself. But Heather lit her candles
whenever she could. She enjoyed the way her candles made her room smell—it was as
warm and comforting as a fuzzy favorite blanket. The candles helped Heather relax. She
2. Y N
even swore that they helped her focus better when she was doing homework. One day,
Heather’s friend Brittany gave Heather an idea she had never considered before. “I’ll bet
candles wouldn’t be hard to make,” Brittany said. “You should learn to make your own.”
3. Y N
1. Who is the main character? 4. Which adverb has a similar meaning

as particularly? 4. Y N
A Sophia
B Heather
A frequently
C Dad
B hardly 5. Y N
D Brittany
C especially
D carefully
2. What does Brittany think

___ / 5
about Heather? 5. What is the phrase as warm and
comforting as a fuzzy favorite Total
A Heather should light her candles all blanket an example of?
the time.
B Heather should buy a lot of candles.
A a simile
C Heather should get rid of her

B personification
scented candles. C a metaphor
D Heather should learn to make her D hyperbole
own candles.
3. Which word is a synonym for focus?
A compose
B imagine
C read
D concentrate

WEEK 34
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Heather’s friend Brittany had suggested that she learn to make candles. That idea made
a lot of sense to Heather because she loved scented candles, and it might be fun to learn
1. Y N
to make them. So Heather asked her mom and dad about candle making. Neither of them
knew how to do it, but her dad suggested that Heather think about getting a candle-making
kit. A few craft stores in town sold them. Maybe one of the people who worked in the stores
would have some good ideas. Heather liked her dad’s idea, so one Saturday afternoon, her
2. Y N
mom drove her and Brittany to a few craft stores. The first one they visited didn’t sell candle-
making kits. But at the second store, they saw several. One of the salespeople helped
Heather choose the right kit for a beginner. Heather couldn’t wait to start.
3. Y N
1. Where does most of this text 4. In this text, what part of speech is
4. Y N take place? the word candle-making?
A craft stores A noun
5. Y N B school B adjective
C Brittany’s house C adverb
D the supermarket D verb
___ / 5
2. How will Heather learn to 5. What is the meaning of kit in
Total make candles? this text?
A She will work with a candle maker. A a baby animal

B She will take lessons. B a set of supplies for making
C something
She will use a candle-making kit.
D Her mom and dad will teach her.
C a collection of clothes
D a container
3. Which word is an antonym of

beginner?
A seller
B learner
C novice
D expert

WEEK 34
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Heather was very excited to get started making her own candles. Heather’s mom and dad
had gotten her a candle-making kit, and she was eager to begin using it. The kit contained 1. Y N
everything she would need: wax, wicks, molds, scented oil, and coloring. Heather’s kit came
with enough supplies for two kinds of candles: pillar candles and container candles. Pillar
candles were tall and straight, and container candles were shorter and wider. The kit came
with round, silver boxes for the container candles. Heather invited Brittany over to help make 2. Y N
candles, and the two girls began. They decided to start with a pillar candle. Heather’s mom
helped them melt the wax, and Heather put the wick in the mold. When the wax was ready,
Heather and Brittany carefully poured it into the mold. They added some red coloring and
some strawberry scent. Soon, Heather had her own strawberry candle! 3. Y N
1. What is the first step in making 4. Which word from the text is a verb? 4. Y N
Heather’s candle?
A container
A melting the wax B scented 5. Y N
B adding red coloring and C poured
strawberry scent
C putting the wick in the mold
D own
D pouring the wax into the mold ___ / 5

5. What is the meaning of mold in
Total
this text?
2. Which object does not come in the
candle-making kit? A soft, loose earth
A molds
B a furry growth
B wax
C a hollow form that gives shape
C scented oil
D a frame
D matches

for supplies?
A wax
B materials
C boxes
D candles

WEEK 34
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Lighting Things Up
Heather’s friend Brittany had suggested that Heather learn to make candles. Heather was
really grateful to Brittany for that idea. Heather’s mom and dad had gotten her a candle-making
kit, and she was really enjoying it. She had already made two pillar candles—one was a
strawberry candle and the other one had a vanilla scent. That weekend, Heather was planning
to make a container candle. This one would be lavender. Heather invited Brittany over to spend
the night on Friday to help her. When Brittany got to Heather’s house, she tossed her backpack
on Heather’s bed, and the two girls got started.
Heather’s dad saw them a few minutes later and teased Heather about spending all her time
making candles. “You just wait—you’ll thank me!” Heather teased back, and the girls returned
to what they were doing. By the time they were finished preparing the container candle, it was
almost time for dinner. Heather’s mom had ordered pizza, and everyone crowded to feast on the
pizza when it arrived. Then suddenly, the lights went out!
“I guess it’s a neighborhood blackout,” her dad said, glancing out the window, “It’s dark all over
the street.”
All of a sudden, Heather and Brittany looked at each other. They both had the same idea.
They ran up to Heather’s room and got some candles, including the two that Heather had made.
Then, they brought them downstairs to the living room. Heather’s dad found a lighter and lit the
candles, and in no time at all, there was plenty of light to eat dinner.
“You see?” Heather

said triumphantly. “I was
right! My candles saved
the day.” Her dad admitted
that Heather was right and
promised not to tease her
again about the candles.
About two hours after

everyone finished eating,
the power was restored.
Everyone was relieved, even
though it had been sort of
fun to eat by candlelight.
Heather and Brittany
returned to making candles.
They would be handy to
have around next time there
was a blackout.

WEEK 34
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Lighting Things Up” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. When is the power restored? 5. Which of these books would Heather
likely want to read?
A before the blackout 1. Y N
B after dinner is over

A A Biography of Thomas Edison
C before Heather and Brittany get home

B You Can Sew Your Own Clothes
from school C The Best New Candle Designs! 2. Y N
D after Heather and Brittany go to bed D How to Win at Computer Games
3. Y N
2. Which prediction makes the 6. Why is the street so dark during
most sense? the blackout?
A Heather’s parents will stop A The other houses on the street do 4. Y N

making candles. not have power.
B Heather’s dad will tell her to stop B There are no other houses.
making candles.
C The other houses are hidden 5. Y N
C Heather’s dad will not tease her again behind trees.
about making candles.
D The street is very long and narrow.
D Heather’s dad will tease her the next 6. Y N
time she makes a candle.
7. Which is the best summary?
3. At the end of the text, how do A This text is about making lights work. 7. Y N
Heather’s parents likely feel about
her making candles? B This text is about making candles.
C This text is about stars.
A grateful
D 8. Y N
This text is about night lights.
B worried
C angry
D 8. What does it mean that Heather’s
jealous candles saved the day?
___ / 8
A She is sad about being teased. Total
4. What can be inferred about the
B
setting of this text? The candles helped the family have
light during the blackout.
A It takes place during school. C Her candles were made in one day.
B It takes place early in the morning. D Heather wants to save the candles to
C It takes place in the middle of use another day.
the night.
D It takes place in the evening.
WEEK 34
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Lighting Things Up.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
In this story, Heather learns to make candles. What would you like to learn to make?
How would you learn? Write about what you would like to learn to make and how you
would learn it.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 35
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
What kinds of rights do you think people should have? For example, you probably
think that people have the right to be safe from burglars. There are a lot of other rights
that many people think we should have, too. That is why we need to have a government. 1. Y N
Governments are there to protect the rights of citizens. In return, citizens support the
government by paying taxes and obeying laws, and some serve in the armed forces. There
are many different kinds of governments. One of them is the republic, which is the kind of
2. Y N
government the United States has. In a republic, citizens elect people to represent them.
Those representatives make laws that protect the citizens. In a republic, citizens do not vote
on laws, but elect people to make and vote on laws.
3. Y N
1. According to this text, why do we 4. Which noun below can also be used
need to have a government? as a verb? 4. Y N
A to protect the rights of citizens A government

B to pay taxes and obey laws B republic 5. Y N
C to serve in the military C support
D to give people what they want D citizens
___ / 5
2. Which is not something citizens do 5. What is the meaning of the phrase
to support the government? in return? Total
A pay taxes A as a favor

B obey laws B instead of
C serve in the military C in exchange
D make laws D most of the time
3. Which word is defined as a person

who lives in a state or country?
A representative
B republic
C law
D citizen

WEEK 35
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
There are many other kinds of governments besides republics. One of them is the
monarchy. A monarchy is a government that is run by a ruler, often a king or a queen. The
1. Y N
monarchy is one of the oldest forms of government. Many ancient people were ruled by
monarchs. For example, in ancient Egypt, the monarch was called the Pharaoh (FAIR-oh).
China and Japan had monarchs for a very long time, too. Some monarchies still exist today.
2. Y N For example, both England and Spain have monarchs. For many centuries, monarchs
made all the decisions, and they could do whatever they wanted. But that is not true today.
Today’s monarchs usually do not have the last word when it comes to making decisions. The
decisions are made by a group of representatives. The monarch still has some power, but it
3. Y N is shared with others.
4. Y N 1. What is this text mostly about? 4. The root cent means 100. The noun
centuries probably means
A China
B A hundreds of days
5. Y N representatives
C Japan
B hundreds of years
D monarchies
C thousands of days
D thousands of years
___ / 5
2. Which statement is true about
Total monarchies? 5. What does the phrase to have the
last word mean?
A In a monarchy, the government is run
by a ruler. A to make the decision
B There are no more monarchies. B to say something last
C The monarchy is a brand-new form C to have no power
of government. D to stand behind everyone else
D Monarchies were not common in
ancient times.

for monarch?
A country
B government
C ruler
D power

WEEK 35
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Sometimes, a government is run by a small group of people. That form of government
is called an oligarchy. The people who run an oligarchy are all members of the same
1. Y N
group. They are not elected to office. Instead, they hold power because they belong to
that particular group. Some oligarchies are run by the very wealthy. Some are run by the
members of a ruling family. Sometimes, they are run by members of one political party.
There have been many oligarchies in history. For example, the kingdom of Sparta was a 2. Y N
city-state in ancient Greece. It was run by an oligarchy. The ruling class of Sparta had all
of the power and made all of the decisions. Ordinary people did not vote. The Soviet Union
lasted from 1917 to 1991; it was also an oligarchy. Only members of the Communist Party
could hold office. There have been other oligarchies, too. 3. Y N
1. Why are the people who run an 4. Which word from the text is 4. Y N
oligarchy in charge? an adjective?
A The people elect them. A wealthy

5. Y N
B They are members of the B party
same group. C oligarchy
C They do not want to be in charge. D member
D They know how to run a government.
___ / 5
5. What is the tone of the text? Total
2. Which is a fact about an oligarchy?
A informative
A A king or queen makes all of B silly
the decisions.
B Anyone may be elected.
C persuasive
C Ordinary people do not vote.

D serious
D There is no government.
3. The root arch means chief in

oligarchy. What does the root
oli– mean?
A many
B few
C the study of
D universe

WEEK 35
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Who’s In Charge?
For as long as people have lived in groups, they have had leaders. And when people began
to live in cities, they began to create governments. Governments do several things for people.
A government helps to protect people’s rights and keep the peace. Governments also protect
the borders of the countries they serve. They also provide things such as education, highways,
and mail service. People cannot easily provide those things for themselves. So the government
provides them. In return, people pay taxes, obey laws, and support the government.
People have tried many different forms of government. For example, one of the earliest
forms of government was the monarchy. In a monarchy, a ruler, usually a king or queen, is in
charge. For many years, monarchs had all of the power. They made all of the decisions. Those
monarchies are called absolute monarchies. There are still monarchies today. But the rulers
cannot do whatever they want. Today, most monarchs share power. They work with a group of
elected representatives. The people vote for the members of that group. These monarchies are
called constitutional monarchies. England and Spain are constitutional monarchies.
People have also been ruled by oligarchies. In an oligarchy, the government is run by a
small group. Some are run by the wealthy, and others are run by members of a ruling family.
Still others are run by members of the same political party. In many oligarchies, the people do
not vote. The people who run the government are in charge because they are members of a
particular group.
Today, people want a voice in their

government, and they want to be able
to vote. So many governments are run
by people who are elected to office. For
example, many governments are republics.
In a republic, the people vote, but they do
not directly vote on laws. They vote for
representatives. Then, those representatives
make laws and vote on those laws. The
United States is a republic. France, Israel,
and Ireland are also republics.
As you can see, there are many different

kinds of governments. Which government do
you think works best?
Queen Elizabeth II of England

WEEK 35
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Who’s In Charge?” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. If a reader doesn’t remember what 5. What is a purpose for reading
an oligarchy is, what could he or this text?
she do? 1. Y N
A to learn about different kinds of
A Review the title and the picture. government
B Reread the paragraph that has that B to learn how to vote 2. Y N
word in it. C to read a personal story
C Say the word out loud. D to learn about a visit to England
D Write the word a few times. 3. Y N
6. How do absolute monarchs most

2. How is an absolute monarchy likely feel about people who vote?
different from an oligarchy? 4. Y N
A They want to teach them to vote.
A An absolute monarchy is run by a B They want them to vote.
small group.
B An absolute monarchy is very large.
C They do not want them to vote. 5. Y N
C An absolute monarchy is run by

D They encourage them to vote.
one ruler.
6. Y N
D An absolute monarchy is elected by 7. What is something that the many
the people. different types of government have
in common?
7. Y N
3. What might happen if there were A They have a queen or king.
no government?
B All the citizens can vote.
A People would pay taxes. C They have nothing in common. 8. Y N
B People would not be as safe. D They protect their citizens and

C keep peace.
There would be new highways.
D People would vote in elections. ___ / 8
8. Why do you think many monarchies
are now constitutional monarchies? Total
4. People who like to vote would like
what form of government? A The people want a king or a queen.
A a republic
B Rulers do not want to share power.
B an oligarchy
C Rulers want to share power.
C an absolute monarchy
D The people want a voice.
D a king or queen

WEEK 35
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Who’s In Charge?” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
If you could design a government, what would it be like? Write about the government
you would have.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

WEEK 36
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1
SCORE
Austin liked to spend time at his friend Devin’s house. One of the greatest things about
Devin’s family was that Devin’s older brother, Jacob, had his own band. Jacob and his band
practiced in Devin’s garage, and Austin really liked to hear them play. One day, Austin and 1. Y N
Devin were talking about the band, and Austin suggested they should start a band of their
own. Devin wasn’t in the least bit interested in being in a band, but he said Austin ought
to learn to play the guitar. “Who knows?” Devin said, “You might get really famous.” Austin
2. Y N
thought about what his friend had said. Maybe it would be a good idea to learn to play the
guitar—the electric guitar. Then, when he was good enough at it, he could have a band like
Jacob’s even if Devin didn’t want to join.
3. Y N
1. Who is the main character? 3. Which prefix could you add

to interested to make a word 4. Y N
A Devin that means “not in the least bit
interested?”
B Austin
C Jacob A hyper– 5. Y N
D Dad B semi–
C un–
2. What is Devin’s suggestion D sub– ___ / 5
for Austin?
Total
A He suggests that Austin not come to 4. Which word from the text can be both
the house. a noun and a verb?
B He suggests that Austin forget A idea
about music.
C He suggests that Austin play in
B interested
Jacob’s band. C band
D He suggests that Austin learn to play D talking
the guitar.
5. Which word has the same meaning

as the phrase ought to?
A should
B cannot
C might
D could

WEEK 36
DAY
2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
SCORE
Austin had decided he wanted to learn to play the electric guitar. It was originally his
friend Devin’s idea, but the more he thought about it, the more Austin liked the idea of being
1. Y N
a guitarist in a band. So he asked his parents if he could have a guitar. His mom and dad
liked the idea, too, but they thought that an electric guitar might be really expensive. Austin
thought so himself. Then one day, he stopped into a music-supply store to look at prices. He
noticed a few ads at the store for used guitars. He asked the manager about the ads. “Oh,
2. Y N
sure,” the manager said. “People are always selling used guitars. That’s really the best way
for a beginner to get an inexpensive instrument.” Now Austin knew how he could get a guitar
without spending a lot of money.
3. Y N
1. What do Austin’s mom and 4. What does the suffix –ist in the noun
4. Y N dad believe? guitarist mean?
A A guitar might be really expensive. A very small
5. Y N B Austin should not play the guitar. B brand new

C Austin can use their guitar. C special kind
D A guitar will probably be very cheap. D someone who does something
___ / 5
2. How will Austin get a guitar without 5. What is inexpensive instrument an
Total spending a lot of money? example of?
A The manager will give him a guitar. A personification

B His mom and dad will give him B alliteration
a guitar. C simile
C He will buy a used guitar. D metaphor
D He will not get a guitar.
3. Which prefix can be added to

expensive to make its antonym?
A in–
B hypo–
C mal–
D super–

WEEK 36
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

3
SCORE
Austin wanted to learn to play the electric guitar. His mom and dad thought it was a good
idea, too, but they were concerned about the cost, and so was Austin. The solution to the
problem turned out to be a used guitar. Austin had discovered that many musicians sell 1. Y N
inexpensive, used electric guitars. So he returned to the music supply store where he had
seen ads for guitars. He wrote down the names and telephone numbers listed on the ads.
He didn’t recognize any of the names he saw on the ads. So his mom and dad insisted on
2. Y N
going with him when he went to look at the guitars. The first two guitars he wanted to see
had already been sold, but the third one was still for sale, and Austin liked it. In a very short
time, Austin had his electric guitar.
3. Y N
1. What is this text mostly about? 4. What does the verb returned tell you
about Austin? 4. Y N
A the history of the electric guitar
B how Austin learns to play the guitar
A He has never been to the
music-supply store.
C how Austin gets an electric guitar B He has been to the music-supply
5. Y N
D where to find an electric guitar store before.

C He does not know where the
music-supply store is.
2. What happens before Austin’s
___ / 5
mom and dad go with him to D He will never go to the music-supply
look at guitars? store. Total
A Austin buys the guitar he wants.

B Austin writes down the names and
numbers listed on the ads. A sarcastic

C Austin and his parents look at guitars. B informal
D Austin finds out that two of the guitars C persuasive
have already been sold.
D guilty
3. Which prefix can be added to sold

to make a word that means “still for
sale”?
A sub–
B ambi–
C bi–
D un–

WEEK 36
DAYS
4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________
Playing in the Band

Austin wanted to play the electric guitar. His friend, Devin, had first suggested the idea, and
Austin thought it was a great one. Someday, he wanted to be in a band, but first he had to learn
to play. So he bought a used electric guitar from a musician who was selling it. At first, Austin
thought it would be easy to learn how to play. Devin’s brother, Jacob, played electric guitar, and
it looked easy when Austin watched him. But as soon as Austin tried to play his own guitar, he
realized how mistaken he was.
Austin tried to play the same songs he heard Jacob and his band play, but he couldn’t make
his guitar sound the same at all. It wasn’t long before he decided he was going to need lessons.
Austin’s mom and dad had thought of that, too, and together, the three of them found a guitar
teacher. Austin attended the first few lessons, but he began to get bored. His teacher kept
giving him little songs and music exercises to do, not real songs like Jacob played. When Austin
complained to his mom and dad about it, his mother advised him, “Be patient. You need to learn
the basics first so you can sound good later when you play harder songs.” Austin didn’t believe
her, but he wasn’t a quitter, either. So he kept going for lessons and practicing.
After a while, Austin started

to sound good when he played,
and he began to be able to play
harder songs. One day, Jacob
and his band even let Austin play
a song with them. Austin didn’t
know if he was ever going to be
famous, but it was going to be fun
finding out!

WEEK 36
DAY
Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

4
Directions Read “Playing in the Band” and then answer the questions.
SCORE
1. Why does Austin try to play his new 5. What does Austin most likely hope
guitar as soon as he gets it? will happen in the future?
1. Y N
A He starts to sound better. A He will have his own band someday.
B He takes guitar lessons. B He will stop playing the guitar.
C He thinks it will be easy to play. C He will never visit Devin and Jacob. 2. Y N
D He realizes that playing the guitar is D He will play only easy songs.
not easy.
3. Y N
6. What inference can be made about
2. Why do Jacob and his band sound Austin’s mom and dad?
better than Austin does at first?
A They do not know Austin wants 4. Y N
A They have practiced more and guitar lessons.
played longer. B They want to play the guitar.
B They have newer guitars. C They wish Austin would not take 5. Y N
C They do not practice. guitar lessons.
D They have a bigger place to play. D They are glad Austin is taking
guitar lessons. 6. Y N
3. Which reflects a reasonable purpose

for reading this story? 7. At the end of the text, what is Austin’s
attitude towards playing the guitar? 7. Y N
A to learn how to play an instrument in
a band A bored
B to sign up to be in the school band B confused and frustrated
8. Y N
C to read about a character who C jealous of Jacob’s band
likes music D proud and pleased with his hard work
D to read about a famous musician who
plays in a band
8. Why doesn’t Austin like his music ___ / 8
lessons at first? Total
4. Which would be a good gift
A
for Austin? His teacher doesn’t give him real
songs to play.
A a basketball B His music teacher is rude to him.
B a science kit C He can’t understand what his music
C a guitar songbook teacher says.
D a cookbook D He doesn’t want to be in a band.

WEEK 36
DAY
5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Reread “Playing in the Band.” Then, read the prompt and respond on
SCORE
___ / 4
What have you learned to do well? Did it take a lot of practice? Write about what you
have learned to do well and how you learned it.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

Answer Key
Week 1 Day 3 Day 5 Day 2
1. D Responses will vary. 1. A
Day 1 2. C 2. B
1. A 3. A Week 4 3. D
2. C 4. C 4. C
3. B Day 1
5. D 5. C
4. B 1. A
5. A Day 4 2. A Day 3
1. B 3. C 1. B
Day 2 2. B 4. B 2. C
1. D 3. D 5. C 3. C
2. C 4. B 4. D
3. B Day 2
5. A 5. A
4. A 1. A
6. B
5. B 2. D Day 4
7. D
3. C 1. A
Day 3 8. A
4. D 2. C
1. A Day 5 5. C 3. C
2. A Responses will vary. 4. A
3. B Day 3
5. D
4. D 1. C
Week 3 6. A
5. C 2. C
7. B
Day 1 3. A
Day 4 8. D
1. B 4. A
1. D 2. C 5. D Day 5
2. D 3. A Responses will vary.
3. B Day 4
4. D
4. A 1. C
5. D Week 6
5. C 2. D
6. A Day 2 3. B Day 1
7. C 1. C 4. B 1. B
8. B 2. D 5. D 2. A
3. C 6. D 3. D
Day 5 4. D 7. B 4. A
Responses will vary. 5. A 8. A 5. A
Week 2 Day 3 Day 5 Day 2

1. A Responses will vary. 1. D
Day 1 2. C 2. B
1. C 3. B Week 5 3. D
2. B 4. D 4. A
3. D Day 1
5. B 5. C
4. C 1. C
5. A Day 4 2. B Day 3
1. B 3. A 1. B
Day 2 2. A 4. C 2. A
1. B 3. D 5. D 3. D
2. A 4. D 4. B
3. D 5. C 5. C
4. D 6. C
5. C 7. B
8. A

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 6 (cont.) Week 8 Day 3 Day 5

1. D Responses will vary.
Day 4 Day 1 2. B
1. D 1. D 3. C Week 11
2. C 2. B 4. B
3. C 3. C Day 1
5. C
4. A 4. B 1. C
5. C 5. B Day 4 2. C
6. C 1. C 3. D
Day 2 2. B 4. D
7. D
1. C 3. D 5. B
8. B
2. A 4. B
Day 5 3. D Day 2
5. D
Responses will vary. 4. B 1. B
6. B
5. A 2. C
7. A
Week 7 8. C
3. A
Day 3 4. B
Day 1 1. D Day 5 5. C
1. D 2. C Responses will vary.
2. C 3. C Day 3
3. A 4. A 1. A
Week 10
4. A 5. B 2. D
5. B Day 1 3. C
Day 4 1. C 4. C
Day 2 1. B 2. A 5. C
1. C 2. C 3. D
2. B 3. D Day 4
4. B
3. C 4. A 1. A
5. B
4. A 5. C 2. D
5. D 6. C Day 2 3. B
7. B 1. A 4. D
Day 3 2. C 5. A
8. A
1. A 3. A 6. D
2. D Day 5 4. B 7. A
3. D Responses will vary. 5. D 8. C
4. C
5. B Week 9 Day 3 Day 5
1. B Responses will vary.
Day 4 Day 1 2. A
1. A 1. A 3. C Week 12
2. D 2. C 4. C
3. D 3. B Day 1
5. C
4. B 4. B 1. C
5. D 5. C Day 4 2. B
6. A 1. D 3. D
Day 2 2. C 4. A
7. B
1. B 3. D 5. A
8. C
2. D 4. B
Day 5 3. B 5. B
Responses will vary. 4. D 6. A
5. A 7. B
8. C

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 12 (cont.) Day 4 Week 15 Day 3

1. B 1. C
Day 2 2. A Day 1 2. A
1. C 3. A 1. A 3. D
2. B 4. B 2. C 4. B
3. C 5. D 3. C 5. D
4. C 6. D 4. D
5. D 5. A Day 4
7. C
1. B
Day 3 8. D Day 2 2. A
1. D Day 5 1. B 3. D
2. C Responses will vary. 2. D 4. C
3. B 3. D 5. A
4. A Week 14 4. A 6. B
5. C 5. A 7. C
Day 1
Day 4 Day 3 8. D
1. A
1. A 2. A 1. B Day 5
2. B 3. B 2. D Responses will vary.
3. B 4. C 3. A
4. A 5. D 4. A Week 17
5. A 5. A
6. A Day 2 Day 1
1. C Day 4 1. D
7. D
2. B 1. D 2. A
8. C
3. A 2. D 3. B
Day 5 4. C 3. C 4. A
Responses will vary. 5. D 4. B 5. C
5. B
Week 13 Day 3 6. B Day 2
1. B 7. A 1. C
Day 1 2. A 2. B
8. B
1. C 3. D 3. A
2. B 4. A Day 5 4. C
3. A 5. C Responses will vary. 5. D
4. B
5. D Day 4 Week 16 Day 3
1. D 1. A
Day 2 2. B Day 1 2. A
1. C 3. D 1. A 3. D
2. B 4. B 2. B 4. C
3. A 5. A 3. C 5. C
4. D 6. A 4. C
5. C 5. C Day 4
7. C
1. C
Day 3 8. A Day 2 2. A
1. A Day 5 1. A 3. C
2. D Responses will vary. 2. B 4. D
3. D 3. B 5. B
4. C 4. D 6. D
5. D 5. A 7. B
8. A

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 17 (cont.) Day 2 Day 4 Week 22

1. A 1. C
Day 5 2. C 2. B Day 1
Responses will vary. 3. B 3. B 1. A
4. C 4. A 2. D
Week 18 5. B 5. A 3. B
4. B
Day 1 Day 3
6. A
7. C 5. C
1. C 1. B
2. D 8. B Day 2
2. C
3. A 3. A Day 5 1. C
4. C 4. D Responses will vary. 2. A
5. B 5. A 3. B
Week 21 4. D
Day 2 Day 4 5. A
1. D 1. C Day 1
2. B 2. D 1. D Day 3
3. B 3. B 2. B 1. B
4. A 4. B 3. A 2. D
5. C 5. B 4. C 3. B
5. A 4. C
Day 3 6. D
7. A 5. B
1. C Day 2
2. A 8. C Day 4
1. A
3. D Day 5 2. D 1. D
4. B Responses will vary. 3. C 2. A
5. C 4. B 3. A
Week 20 5. B 4. A
Day 4
5. D
1. D Day 1 Day 3 6. B
2. C 1. D 1. C 7. C
3. A 2. B 2. D 8. C
4. B 3. A 3. A
5. B 4. C 4. D Day 5
6. D 5. B 5. B Responses will vary.
7. A
8. C Day 2 Day 4 Week 23
1. D 1. D
Day 5 2. A 2. A Day 1
Responses will vary. 3. C 3. A 1. A
4. A 4. D 2. A
Week 19 5. A 5. C 3. D
4. A
Day 1 Day 3
6. B
7. C 5. D
1. C 1. C
2. B 8. D Day 2
2. B
3. A 3. D Day 5 1. C
4. D 4. A Responses will vary. 2. B
5. D 5. D 3. D
4. B
5. A

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 23 (cont.) Day 5 Day 2 Day 4

Responses will vary. 1. A 1. C
Day 3 2. D 2. D
1. B Week 25 3. B 3. B
2. B 4. C 4. D
3. D Day 1
5. A 5. A
4. C 1. A
6. B
5. D 2. A Day 3
7. C
3. B 1. D
Day 4 8. B
4. D 2. A
1. C 5. C 3. C Day 5
2. C 4. A Responses will vary.
3. A Day 2
5. C
4. B 1. A
Week 28
5. B 2. C Day 4
6. D 3. D 1. D Day 1
7. D 4. B 2. A 1. B
8. A 5. A 3. D 2. D
4. B 3. C
Day 5 Day 3
5. D 4. A
Responses will vary. 1. B
6. A 5. A
2. C
7. A
Week 24 3. B
8. C
Day 2
4. D 1. C
Day 1 5. A Day 5 2. A
1. C Responses will vary. 3. B
2. A Day 4
4. D
3. D 1. B
Week 27 5. C
4. A 2. C
5. D 3. B Day 1 Day 3
4. A 1. B 1. D
Day 2 5. A 2. D 2. A
1. B 6. C 3. A 3. B
2. A 7. D 4. C 4. C
3. D 8. D 5. D 5. B
4. B
5. C Day 5 Day 2 Day 4
Responses will vary. 1. A 1. B
Day 3 2. C 2. B
1. C Week 26 3. B 3. D
2. D 4. A 4. A
3. B Day 1
5. D 5. D
4. A 1. B
6. A
5. C 2. C Day 3
7. B
3. A 1. D
Day 4 8. C
4. D 2. C
1. C 5. D 3. A Day 5
2. A 4. B Responses will vary.
3. B 5. C
4. B
5. A
6. C
7. B
8. A

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 29 Day 3 Day 4 Week 33

1. D 1. D
Day 1 2. A 2. A Day 1
1. A 3. C 3. D 1. D
2. A 4. C 4. C 2. B
3. C 5. B 5. A 3. A
4. B 6. A 4. C
5. C Day 4 5. B
7. A
1. A
Day 2 8. A Day 2
2. D
1. B 3. B Day 5 1. A
2. A 4. C Responses will vary. 2. C
3. C 5. A 3. D
4. B 6. C Week 32 4. C
5. A 7. B 5. A
Day 1
Day 3 8. C Day 3
1. C
1. D Day 5 2. B 1. D
2. A Responses will vary. 3. A 2. C
3. C 4. A 3. A
4. A Week 31 5. D 4. A
5. A 5. A
Day 1 Day 2
Day 4 1. C 1. B Day 4
1. D 2. A 2. D 1. B
2. B 3. D 3. A 2. A
3. B 4. C 4. C 3. D
4. D 5. A 5. B 4. B
5. C 5. C
6. A Day 2 Day 3 6. B
7. A 1. B 1. A 7. B
8. A 2. D 2. C 8. C
3. C 3. D
Day 5 4. A 4. C Day 5
Responses will vary. 5. A 5. B Responses will vary.
Week 30 Day 3 Day 4 Week 34

1. D 1. D
Day 1 2. A 2. D Day 1
1. D 3. B 3. A 1. B
2. A 4. C 4. A 2. D
3. C 5. C 5. A 3. D
4. C 6. B 4. C
5. B 7. C 5. A
Day 2 8. C Day 2
1. C Day 5 1. A
2. B Responses will vary. 2. C
3. D 3. D
4. C 4. B
5. D 5. B

Answer Key (cont.)
Week 34 (cont.) Day 4

1. B
Day 3 2. C
1. A 3. B
2. D 4. A
3. B 5. A
4. C 6. C
5. C 7. D
Day 4 8. D
1. B Day 5
2. C Responses will vary.
3. A
4. D Week 36
5. C
6. A Day 1
7. B 1. B
8. B 2. D
3. C
Day 5 4. C
Responses will vary. 5. A
Week 35 Day 2
1. A
Day 1 2. C
1. A 3. A
2. D 4. D
3. D 5. B
4. C
5. C Day 3
1. C
Day 2 2. B
1. D 3. D
2. A 4. B
3. C 5. B
4. B
5. A Day 4
1. C
Day 3 2. A
1. B 3. C
2. C 4. C
3. B 5. A
4. A 6. D
5. A 7. D
8. A
Day 5
Responses will vary.

References Cited
Marzano, Robert. 2010. When Practice Makes Perfect…Sense. Educational Leadership 68
(3): 81–83.
National Reading Panel. 2000. Report of the National Reading Panel. Teaching Children to
Read: An Evidence-Based Assessment of the Scientific Research Literature on Reading and
its Implication for Reading Instruction (NIH Publication No. 00-4769). Washington, DC:
U.S. Government Printing Office.
Rasinski, Timothy V. 2003. The Fluent Reader: Oral Reading Strategies for Building Word
Recognition, Fluency, and Comprehension. New York: Scholastic.
———. 2006. Fluency: An Oft-Neglected Goal of the Reading Program. In Understanding

and Implementing Reading First Initiatives, ed. C. Cummins, 60–71. Newark, DE:
International Reading Association.
Wolf, Maryanne. 2005. What is Fluency? Fluency Development: As the Bird Learns to Fly.
Scholastic professional paper. New York: ReadAbout. http://teacher.scholastic.com
/products/fluencyformula/pdfs/What_is_Fluency.pdf (accessed June 8, 2007).

Digital Resources
Accessing the Digital Resources

The digital resources can be downloaded by following
these steps:
1. Go to www.tcmpub.com/digital
2. Sign in or create an account.
3. Click Redeem Content and enter the

ISBN number, located on page 2 and the
back cover, into the appropriate field on ISBN:
the website. 9781425809270
4. Respond to the prompts using the book to

view your account and available digital content.
5. Choose the digital resources you would like to download. You can download
all the files at once, or you can download a specific group of files.
Please note: Some files provided for download have large file sizes. Download
times for these larger files will vary based on your download speed.
Contents of the Digital Resources

Teacher Resources Student Resources
• Assessing Fluency • Practice Pages
• Writing Rubric
• Practice Page Item Analysis Chart
• Student Item Analysis Chart

NOTES

Thank you for purchasing this eBook.
This eBook is copyrighted. If you accessed this eBook without making

payment, you should be aware that neither the author nor the publisher has
received any compensation, and you may be in violation of state, federal, and/or
international law.
For further information about our products and services, please e-mail us at:
[email protected].
“ Thank you for helping us

create a world in which
”
children love to learn!
5301 Oceanus Drive Huntington Beach, CA 92649-1030 800.858.7339 FAX 714.230.7070 www.tcmpub.com
Thank You Pages.indd 1 10/17/19 7:07 AM

Grade 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6

2 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Introduction and Research

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 3

Easy to Use and Standards Based

Question College and Career Readiness Standards

4 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Using the Practice Pages

SCORE body uses that energy

Be growing C heal Some foods are

Using the Scoring Guide

The Blowout Blo

6 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Developing Students’ Fluency Skills

Student Fluency Norms Based On Words Correct Per Minute (WCPM)

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 7

To complete the Practice Page Item Analyses:

To complete the Student Item Analyses:

8 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Using the Results to Differentiate Instruction

Small-Group or Individual Support

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 9

Week: _____ Day: _____ Item # 1 2 3 4 5 # correct

#50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade

#50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade

Student Name: Sample Student

12 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Student Name: Sample Student

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 13

How To Find Standards Correlations

Purpose and Intent of Standards

College and Career Readiness

TESOL and WIDA Standards

14 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1. Which title summarizes this text? 4. What is a grammatical feature of this

A from growing 5. Which is the tone of this text? ___ / 5

A It means that everyone should eat

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 15

2 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Directions Read the text and then answer the questions.

5. Which word is a synonym for gain?

A Calories are not important.

B It is a good idea to eat as much as

3. Which prefix could be added to

16 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

1. Which of these is not a 4. If the author recommends that

A 5. What does the phrase most of

3. What is the definition of usually?

© Shell Education #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade 17

4–5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

You can enjoy fast food sometimes

18 #50927—180 Days of Reading for Sixth Grade © Shell Education

Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

D They served smaller portions. twenty minutes.

7. It takes Celia thirty minutes to

D They do not fit on plates.

5 Name: _______________________________ Date:__________________

Week: _ Day: _ Item # 1 2 3 4 5 # correct

Name: _____________ Date:

2 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

4–5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

2 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

4–5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

2 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

4–5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

5 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

2 Name: _____________ Date:

Name: _____________ Date:

4–5 Name: _____________ Date: